Home

Panasonic KX-TD 500 User Manual

1. Ann Parker Cc Beth Bob Jones Q Caro E or e Y Chris C4 MENU F User Manual 493 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing Notes System Speed Dialing e You can press the Function button F1 through 1 Press the Extension F3 STA Speed F8 or F10 on the same line of the desired item SYS Speed F9 button instead of the CALL S3 button 2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at For System Speed Dialing and Extension the arrow Dialing before rotating the Jog Dial you can 3 Press the CALL S3 button or go off hook press the corresponding alphabet key to select e g the desired letter lt Example gt Press 2 twice to display B items Using the Soft button or rotating Jog Dial directly Third Display WED JAN01 03 00P Extension STA Speed Features SYS Speed System Speed Dialing Call Log STA EXT FEAT dm dM Station Speed Dialing Extension Dialing Yoshida Zaydel Adam Zaydel Q Adam or PS Alice Alice Ann Parker MENU Yoshida Co Co Co Co Ann Parker MENU 00000 UO000 Ann Parker Beth Bob Jones Q EY or Carol Chris UO000 MENU J monui 494 User Manual Station Features and Operatio
2. e Enter the password Press LCS button y y Hands free Mode Private Mode Having a conversation oa with another party m Alert Tone Call Waiting Tone l To monitor To monitor To stop the tone Automatic Hang up Press SP PHONE MONITOR Press FLASH or ICM LCS PDN or Answer button LCS Cancel button To cancel monitoring To intercept the call To cancel monitoring To intercept the call Press FLASH or LCS Cancel button 1 To hold the current call press the HOLD button Lift the handset or press Press FLASH or SP PHONE MONITOR LCS Cancel button or LCS button Lift the handset or press SP PHONE or MONITOR or LCS button To return to the held call press the CO button whose indicator light flashes green slowly User Manual 283 Station Features and Operation PT SLT When using the handset in the Private Mode To set LCS on e Press LCS button gt gt To cancel LCS e Enter the password Press LCS button y y Hands free Mode Private Mode Having a conversation gt ss p with another party Alert Tone j Call Waiting Tone l To monitor j To monitor To stop the tone Automatic Hang up Lift the handset Press FLASH or LCS Cancel button
3. 70 Conference CONF Button CO H 71 Log In Log Out Button t DSS 72 Phantom Button PF H 73 Day Night Button 74 Primary Directory Number PDN Button 75 Secondary Directory Number SDN Button 77 Alarm Button 78 Tone Through Button L 79 Group Log In Log Out Button 8 Voice Mail VM Transfer Button 90 Two Way Record Button H 91 Two Way Transfer Button 92 Live Call Screening LCS Button 93 Live Call Screening LCS Cancel Button 94 Answer Button 95 Release Button 97 Alert Button 98 Group FWD Button 0 Single CO S CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Group CO G CO Button CO CO Ringing Tone Selection for CO Button ICM ICM Ringing Tone Selection for ICM Button SDN 76 PDN SDN Key Delayed Ringing Assignment HPhantom Phantom Phantom Button Ringing On Off Assignment Function Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment F1 F10 KX T7235 KX T7436 only PROGRAM Exit Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digi
4. Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Ringing Transfer User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual 367 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 69 Secret Busy Override You can interrupt an existing call either between two inside parties or between an inside party and an outside party without informing the other party Some extensions may be restricted from performing this function To interrupt an existing call 7230 7235 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call Lift the handset or press Press Over S2 SP PHONE MONITOR e Party A and Party B in conversation do not know that their conversation is being monitored by Party C PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call C 2 Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR e Party A and Party B in conversation do not know that their conversation is being monitored by Party C To change to the three party conference call When Secret Busy Override is executed ICM DN A three party conference E Sal i is now established Press the ICM or DN corresponding to the desired caller 368 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT
5. Walking COS Calls using your privileges at another extension Enter password 000 000 oo o Dial your extension number Dial the line access code if required and phone number User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 10 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features The KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephones allow you to make a call or operate the features using the display message 1 Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 2 System Feature Access Menu The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in alphabetical order The available features are as follows Absent Message Capability Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Cancel Background Music BGM External Call Log Incoming Call Log Incoming Log Lock Call Park Call Pickup CO Line Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Door Opener Doorphone Call Electronic Station Lockout Executive Busy Override Deny External Modem Control Group Call FWD Group Log In Log Out Live Call Screening LCS Password Set Log In Log Out Message Waiting Night Service On Off Outgoing Message OGM Paging External Paging Group Paging ANSWER Paging DENY Paralleled Telephone Connection Pickup Dialing Hot Line Remote DND Do Not Disturb
6. set at your Daily alarm 1 for Yes 0 for No telephone Enter lock code To set press PROG S3 button 000 through 999 To cancel press CLR S2 button ooo On hook i ooo Va gt oo _ co Time hh mm 07 00 Co Remote DND dfn y AM PM 0 1 0 Co il Co operator manager only GL i Dady ENO 0 oo Refer to the twice to deny MENU CLR PROG corresponding feature Once to allow in Section 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features On hook On hook Me J A 2E v G cha 485 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Tenth Display UCD Monitor Mode Allows Supervisor Extension to monitor the number of calls in the waiting queue N J a N Cancel Set gt a gt UCD Monitor On hook Enter FDN Mode for UCD Group Allows Supervisor y ooo Extension to monitor GL EE the number of calls o in the waiting queue N N Cancel l Set J On hook On hook Enter FDN for UCD Group JE k ooo oo o Trunk Route Control operator manager only Refer to the On hook corresponding feature in Section 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features 486 ye PREV NEXT MENU Tenth Display gt PHY TRK Route CTL UCD Monitor End UCD Monitor STRT Walking COS gt FDN gt code ext MENU PREV NEXT Returns to the first display
7. cece ceseeseseneeneeceseceseceaeceeeeeneeeaecnaeesaaees 170 4 3 7 Background Music BGM cesccccssseceseeeceeceesaecesaeceseaeeeeeeeceaeeeaeeseaeceeaaeeeeeeeenaeees 173 4 3 8 Busy Station Signaling BSS 0 ececcceceseeeseecenaeceeaaeeeeeeeceaeeeaeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeens 175 4 3 9 Call F rwarding eenen enana ae aaa a na eara eea aeaea a eesin 177 4 3 10 Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group eessseeeeeereereerereereereeserreeee 186 ALE Call Hold lnc ea a nS erences ee Se 189 ASD Call Parke acess ie ani ateai becca stead E a Ea a E aE Eee ER eaten A E 194 4 3 13 Call PickUp aaa aaa tale desk teas ie aaee Rane edie eee 197 4 3 14 Call Pickup Demy sites cesteccsseuesccetbe echo slates ad ee ase dee sae WE dae 200 43ND Call Splitting anie oen dak ho decent cece e a E Ea eda oet a a lea ale ten 202 4 3 16 Call Transferen e Aa li ii i ein dan wie hei eee 204 ASAT Call WAUN e aee e a e e a o a ea o e anea esee eeann 211 4 3 18 Call Waiting from Central Office eseesseeseeseseeeseeesssrsresresresresresesresrssreererreesesresrs 216 4 3 19 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 00 0 0 eccccccesceceeeeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeesas 219 4 3 20 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR ecco iss eeds vce thse a eases Aas e evan te Shek obe TEE ects 221 432A Conference S Party ei e norrena o a a a eaa a dees ttadees seats 223 4 3 22 Conference
8. e When canceling B Out Cancelled Hang up or press SP PHONE 451 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling PT and SLT wa 702 Te 11 trunk port physical no wont 7 1216 Lo Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7261 Enter the trunk port physical SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7260 number lt PT Display Example gt e When setting Mp a yer g B Out 10201 M J G Wa When canceling B Out Cancelled Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Confirming 7235 7436 c Features Cc BSY Out Confirm PHY Lift the handset or Press Features Press BSY Out Confirm press SP PHONE Mp a trunk port physical no te i v Gba Enter the trunk port Dial tone Hang up or press physical number SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt e When setting B Out 10201 e When no setting B Out None 452 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Confirming MODE Press MODE until Feature Access is displayed Lift the handset or press SP PHONE h J Dial tone trunk port physical no Enter the trunk port physical number lt PT Display Example gt e When setting B Out e When no setting B Out 10201 None Press SHIFT until FEAT is displayed play ly he trunk port physical no i Enter the trunk
9. 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Transfer User Manual References None User Manual 365 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 68 Ringing Transfer Allows a DN type PT user to transfer a call on the SDN button flexible button to the owner extension of the SDN which has the PDN button associated with it simply by pressing the SDN button Ringing transfer can be done either with or without announcement Screened Call Transfer PT DN type During a conversation on an SDN button wg g amp Press SDN Ringback tone Wait for Announce Hang up or flexible button an answer press SP PHONE e The call is transferred to the PDN owner Unscreened Call Transfer PT DN type During a conversation on an SDN button g Gla Press SDN Ringback tone Hang up or flexible button press SP PHONE e The call is transferred 366 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions PT DN If the owner extension is in the Station or User Programming mode Ringing Transfer does not function e FWD DND Override The call transferred by this features rings the PDN owner extension even if Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature is assigned on it PT DN A call made by this feature rings the destination PDN button immediately even if delayed ringing or no ring is set on that PDN button Please refer to Section 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment
10. CLR lt PT Display Example gt CO SeSEE xxxxx trunk port physical number CLR e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You can assign the same CO line to an S CO and a G CO button respectively e AnS CO button assigned to a DSS button is available for monitoring the call activity only not available for making and receiving a call 522 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 18 Tone Through Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Tone Through button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL DSS T 6E STORE Press the desired Dial 78 Press STORE DSS button lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights 2 WAY REC e The display shows the initial CLR programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 523 DSS Console Features 5 2 19 Two Way Record Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Two Way Record button This allows you to record a conversation into your own mailbox Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROG
11. UCD Setting Supervisor Extension Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Uniform Call Distribution UCD User Manual References e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 394 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 82 Voice Mail Transfer You can transfer the calls to the Voice Processing System so that callers can leave their messages in a desired extension mailbox When you transfer the call to the designated extension If the extension has set the Call Forwarding function whose destination is Voice Mail The call will be forwarded to Voice Mail If the extension has not set the Call Forwarding function You can retrieve the call and then transfer the call to Voice Mail by One Touch If the call returns to you VM Transfer extension no Press Voice Mail VM Dial the extension Press DSS Transfer flexible button number flexible button The call will be forwarded to the Voice Mail e The caller can leave the message according to the Voice Mail guidance Conditions e PT A flexible button can be assigned as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button by Station User or System Programming e PT A user s Voice Mailbox number password etc can be assigned as a Voice Mailbox ID Programming Guide References e 3 3
12. Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL press SP PHONE FEAT is displayed Ext BGM On Off is displayed e Pressing this button alternates between On and Off modes e The display shows either one of the following depending on whether the BGM is on or off lt PT Display Example gt E External BGM On BGM is on y Gla or Confirmation tone Hang up or press External BGM Off BGM is off and dial tone SP PHONE PT and SLT y hy S pdr y gt Lees g Bink Lift the handset or press Dial 35 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR The display shows either one of the following depending on whether the BGM is on or off lt PT Display Example gt External BGM On BGM is on or External BGM Off BGM is off Conditions Hardware Requirements It is required to connect a user supplied external pager Up to two pagers and up to two external music sources can be installed in the system e To make BGM External possible you must enable BGM and select a music source by System Programming lt Section 4 6 External Paging in the Programming Guide gt User Manual 409 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e External Pager Priority Priority of access to external pager is 1 TAFAS 2 Paging 3 BGM Higher priorities will override the BGM e The default is Exter
13. One of the dial tones Please refer to Section 6 1 3 Tone List Conditions e SLT The delimiter 99 is available for rotary type SLTs only Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Dial Information CTI Features Guide References None User Manual References e None 234 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 25 Data Line Security Your extension is protected against interruptions from the Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override features Data communication devices such as computers and facsimiles operate uninterrupted Setting Canceling PT and SLT x 7 JL3 JLo Lt ow e Q 7 3 l o 0 To cancel Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7301 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7300 and dial tone 5 lt PT Display Example gt Gwa e When setting Hang up or press Data Mode On SP PHONE MONITOR When canceling Data Mode Off Conditions e Automatic Privacy Assigning Data Line Security always offers conversation privacy unless Privacy Release is executed e If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security it applies to the both extensions e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15
14. The INTERCOM or DN indicator light turns green Repeat these steps extension phone no Dial extension phone number Talk to the Press CONF of the other party other party e You must dial a line access code 9 or 801 The call is parked in the idle parking zone through 848 as the leading digit s when with the smallest zone number calling an outside party A 5 party conference is now established Press CONF Confirmation tone e All the calls you parked are retrieved from the parking zones 228 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To terminate the 5 party conference conference originator only During the 5 party conference call g CO ON Gida oR OW or UA e All other participants are disconnected from the call Press an idle CO or DN Hang up or press button SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions e Up to two 5 party conference calls can be held at a time in the system even if TSW Conference Expansion card is installed on the TSW card e Conference call arrangement A 5 party conference call can include both inside and outside parties in any combination e Conference trunk At least three idle conference trunks are required to establish a 5 party conference call e Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override does not function to the extension engaged in the 5 party conference call CONF Conference button If a CONF button is not provided on a PT it can b
15. e To delete the current entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name Press NEXT or PREV or SELECT Press END Conditions e Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e For entering characters please refer to Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only 124 User Manual User Programming User Manual References e 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory e 45 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory User Manual 125 User Programming 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on Proprietary Telephones in the system Selection 126 e Extension number 3 or 4 digits e Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO 10101 through 31408 trunk port physical number 1 DSS 3 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch Dialing 24 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None Owner Extension or 3 through 4 digits Another Phantom extension number 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 70 Conference None 71 Log In Log Out None 72 Phantom 3 through 4 digits Phantom extension number 73 Day Night None 74 PDN None 75 SDN 3 through 4 digits Owner
16. Day Night Lunch Break Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Operator Group e Manager Extension 1 6 Originating Features e Operator Call User Manual References None 326 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access There are the following your ways to select an idle CO line for making a call Type Description How to access Idle Selects an idle CO line automatically Dial the feature number for from the trunk groups assigned to the Local CO Line Access ARS extension default 9 Or press a Loop CO L CO Button lt PT only gt Direct Selects an idle CO line by pressing an Press an idle CO S CO G idle CO button directory CO L CO Button lt PT only gt Individual Selects the desired CO line without Press a Single CO S CO Trunk dialing the line access number button lt PT only gt Trunk Group Select an idle CO line from the Dial the trunk group access desired trunk group assigned to the number and a trunk group extension number Or press a Group CO G CO button lt PT only gt Trunk Access Idle PT and SLT CO L For PT D R j 2 o For SLT PT amp Lift the handset or press For PT Press CO assigned Dial tone Dial the phone number Talk SP PHONE MONITOR as Loop CO For SLT PT Dial 9 v G Wa The selected CO indicator e The display shows the phone number
17. Lift the handset or press Dial 742 Enter the phone number Dial Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone e You must dial a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 as the first digit when storing an outside phone number Setting Canceling PT and SLT o zl f x tt Q 7 4 0 Gla Lift the handset or press To set Dial 741 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 740 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Dialing PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions e This feature does not work if you go off hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold e This feature does not work if a message notification is left on your extension e Up to 24 digits consisting of 0 through 9 x and P Pause can be stored cannot be stored User Manual 355 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e During the waiting time after going off hook you can dial another party and override this feature This waiting time between going off hook and connecting with the called line can be changed by System Programming Default 1 second e LP Regarding the PT with a PF12 button the number stored in the PF12 button is used for Pickup Dialing e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hoo
18. To cancel monitoring To intercept the call To cancel monitoring To intercept the call Press FLASH or Lift the handset or Press FLASH or Press LCS button LCS Cancel button press SP PHONE LCS Cancel button MONITOR or LCS or hang up button To hold the current call press the HOLD button To return to the held call press the CO button whose indicator light flashes green slowly Setting the password ie password wo E L FON 7 o o password password cbs Lift the handset or press Dial 799 Enter the 3 digit password Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 000 through 999 twice and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Password XXX password Note e In order to change the password cancel the current password and then set a new password 284 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling the password R Ge Lift the handset or press Dial 799 Enter the same password Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR you used to set and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Password Cancel Setting Live Call Screening When the telephone is idle and on hook LCS Password Press LCS flexible button Enter the password lt PT Display Example gt The LCS indicator light turns on LCS Canceling Live
19. To transfer a call to a phantom extension Unscreened Call Transfer During a conversation My M TRANSFER die die Phantom 7 g Co Co G IRA d Press TRANSFER Confirmation Dial tone Press Phantom Ringback tone Hang up or press tone flexible button SP PHONE MONITOR e Ringing starts at the destination The call is The other party is placed on hold consultation hold extension transferred During a conversation phantom extension no Flash the Confirmation Dial tone Dial the destination phantom Ringback tone Hang up switchhook tone extension number 3 or 4 digits The other party is placed on hold e Ringing starts at the destination extension consultation hold gmg 352 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To answer a phantom extension call While the Phantom button indicator light is flashing green and INTERCOM button associated with the incoming call is flashing green or CO DN button associated with the incoming call is flashing red Phantom CO INTERCOM DN or CIC or Press Phantom Press CO or INTERCOM or DN associated flexible button with the incoming call FON Lift the handset Conditions e A phantom number must be assigned by System Programming before assigning the Phantom button by Station User or System Programming e If several extensions have the same phantom extension number they will ring simultaneously e A maximum of
20. cceccceesseeeseeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeaeceaaeceeeeeceeeeeesees 510 5 2 6 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Assignment cccecceeeseeeestecceeeeeeeeeeeees 511 5 2 7 FWD DND Button Assignment ccc eccceseecesteeesseceeseceeaeeceeceeesaeceaaeceeaeeeeaeeeeaees 512 5 2 8 Group CO G CO Button Assignment eeeeeceesteeseseeceececeeecesaeceeaeeeeeeeeeaees 513 5 2 9 Group FWD Button Assignment cee eeeeseesceescecnseceeceseesseeseeeeeaecaaessaeeneeesaeenes 514 5 2 10 Live Call Screening LCS Button Assignment ccccceecceeeseceeeeeceeneeeeeeeeesees 515 5 2 11 Live Call Screening LCS Cancel Button Assignment 0 ce ceeecceeeeeeeneeeeees 516 5 2 12 Message Waiting MESSAGE Button Assignment 0 ccceeeeceeeeeeeetteeeeneeeeees 517 5 2 13 One Touch Dialing Button Assignment cee eeeeeesseeeeeeeneeceaeesaecnsecneeenseeeaes 518 5 2 14 One Touch Access Assignment for System Features cece ereere 519 5 2 15 Release Button Assignment snieter otea aaeeea Ra OS EEEE NEEE 520 User Manual Table of Contents 5 2 16 SAVE Button Assignment ccccccessecesseeeeeeceeaeeeeaaeceaeeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeseaaeceeaeeeeeeees 521 5 2 17 Single CO S CO Button Assignment 0 0 0 eececsseceenceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeenaeceeaeeeeeeeees 522 5 2 18 Tone Through Button Assignment eee cesecseceseceeeceseeeseesseeceseesaecsaecnaeenseeees 523 5 2 19 Two Way Record Button Assignment 0 00 0 ceceeeceseeeeeeee
21. ext Data Line On Off s1 0 Door Open s1 8 Doorphone Call 1 8 Extrn BGM On Off Extrn MODEM CTL s1 5 FWD Cancel Once gt ext G FWD 1 0 FDN FDN G Login out 1 0 FDN LCS Password sabcabc Log Lock Call sabcabc BSY Ovr DNY 1 0 C Pickup CO C PickupDNY 1 0 C PickupDRT ext C Pickup Grp C Waiting 0 3 Call Park 00 99 Callback Cancel COS Primary ext COS Second ext Data Line 1 0 Door Open 1 8 Doorphone 1 8 Ext BGM On Off Extrn MODEM 1 5 FWD Cancel Once G FWD G Login out LCS abcabc Log Lock abcabc Deny or allow other people from joining your conversation Pick up a CO call for other extension s Deny or allow other people from picking up your calls Pick up a specific extension s call Pick up acall within your extension group Cancel or set the Call Waiting feature Call Waiting OHCA or Whisper OHCA Place a call on hold in a system parking area Cancel the setting which reserves a busy line Assign the Primary COS Assign the Secondary COS Refuse or accept an indication tone e g call waiting tone Unlock the door Call the doorphone Turn on off the background music through the external pagers Control the external modem by sending a pre assigned AT Command Cancel the Call Forwarding feature set at other extensions Set or cancel forwarding all calls to an incoming group Join or l
22. 1 Lift the handset 1 2 Press the VOLUME UP A DOWN V Control button e The display shows lt Example gt 2 Handset volume level 3 A VOLUME Vy e You may also adjust the handset receiver volume during a conversation using the handset receiver To adjust the headset volume Be sure the headset is connected BP PHONE 1 Press the SP PHONE button 2 Press the VOLUME UPA DOWN V Control button e The display shows 2 lt Example gt EAS p Headset volume level 3 To adjust the ringer volume KX T7230 and KX T7235 While the telephone is ringing A 1 Press the VOLUME UP A DOWN V Control button Sa e The display shows lt Example gt Ringer volume level 3 44 User Manual DPT Overview While the telephone is idle and on hook 1 Press the RING S2 button es e The telephone will ring 2 Press the VOLUME UP A DOWN V Control button e The telephone will stop ringing in about 4 seconds e When the volume level is 0 no indication the display shows RNGOFF vou KX T7220 and KX T7250 1 Adjust the RINGER Volume Selector lever to the desired setting OFF LOW HIGH OFF e ee HIGH LOW To adjust the speaker volume 1 Press the SP PHONE or MONITOR button 2 Press the VOLUME UP A DOWN V Control button SP PHONE MONITOR r e The display shows lt Example gt 2 TK SE nee a ee volume level 12
23. 1 to set On 0 to cancel Off Set Cancel Store Paging Group On hook Pages to all or particular Dial 1 or 0 paging group z BB G i Dial the paging group 1 Set On number 01 through 16 or 0 Cancel Off 01 16 paging group no all paging groups On hook sin GL 484 Enter phone number and On hook v Glia User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Ninth Display PREV NEXT MENU Ninth Display Remote DND ext Remote Timed Reminder Station Lock abcabc Station Program Clear Timed Reminder Electronic Station Lockout Denies or allows other people from using your telephone MENU PREV NEXT Timed Reminder Sets or cancels the See the next page alarm ringing time Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call operator manager only Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features S Press the desired Function button and enter the required parameters Time hh mm 07 00 co AM PM 0 1 0 Daily Y N 1 0 0 Co MENU CLR Station 1 1 Program Clear Parameters J g Time hh mm hour 01 through 12 minute 00 through 59 User Manual Clears the features AM PM 0 for AM 1 for PM
24. CO OR Press a flexible button assigned as One Touch Dialing Phantom DSS or SAVE or press REDIAL e The SP PHONE indicator light turns red e The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light turns green Conditions e PT DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also activate this feature PT This feature must be initially assigned by Station Programming Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Full One Touch Dialing e One Touch Dialing e Redial 1 12 Conversation Features e Hands free Operation 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS User Manual 271 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory User Manual References 272 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 52 One Touch Dialing 4 3 66 Redial User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 39 Handset Microphone Mute While on a handset call you can turn off your PT s handset microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the room When you activate Handset Microphone Mute you can still listen to the other party s voice but he cannot hear your voice Setting While on a handset call AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO
25. PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Limited Call Duration 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party Class of Service COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions Please refer to Class of Service COS of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide 232 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e Conference Unattended 1 13 Audible Tone Features Hold Recall User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party User Manual 233 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 24 CTI Computer Telephony Integration Code Entry A CTI Code max 16 digits can be sent from the KX TD500 to the CTI application such as Panasonic Call Center Management Software CMS The code is interpreted by the application for suitable action For example in CMS code 20 means the ACD agent wishes to take a break The feature number of CTI Code Entry is Blank by default You must specify it by System Programming For details consult your manager or dealer Entering CTI codes PT and SLT Ij ron PI om E Lift the handset or press Dial feature number Dial tone 3 Enter CTI code Dial SP PHONE MONITOR max 16 digits lt PT Display Example gt Enter ID Code e You may dial 99 instead of
26. e For entering characters please refer to Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 K X T7436 only e You can enter a maximum of seven characters per message which can be programmed at each user s station The extension user can enter 0 through 9 and for the characters If the user enters digits less than the number of characters it is recommended to fill the remaining characters with or e To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt lt a Features Guide References 1 17 Display Features e Absent Message Capability User Manual 139 User Programming 3 2 9 009 Quick Dial Number Set Description Stores up to eight quick dial numbers Selection e Location number 1 through 8 e Desired number 24 digits max Default All location numbers Not Stored 140 User Manual User Programming Programming Display PT KEKEKE eo Dial 009 Press NEXT Enter a location number 1 through 8 lt PT Display gt lt PT Display gt e To enter location number 1 you 009 QUICK DIAL Location NO gt can also press NEXT lt PT Display Example gt 1 Not Stored lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed m NEXT A E E Enter a desired number Press STORE Enter the desired location number 1 through 8 SELECT e To delete the current
27. normal display 7235 7436 While receiving an incoming CO call the display shows the caller s telephone number and name 0111111111 JOHN WHITE Extension STA Speed Features SYS Speed Call Log You can see the caller s information 0111111111 JOHN WHITE Extension STA Speed Features SYS Speed You can see the Call Log normal display INFO LOG Press INFO S1 to see the call duration time You can see the call duration time 10101 12 0030 Extension STA Speed Features SYS Speed Call Log INFO LOG Press LOG S2 to record the information You can record the call information in the call log The Caller ID service provides you with a caller s information such as his name and telephone number on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls Please refer to Caller ID Service in Section 1 5 Attended Features of the Features Guide for further information User Manual 461 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions This feature is available for KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 only The SHIFT indicator light may turn on when receiving a call Pressing this button provides you with more information about the caller Ifa CO line name is assigned you can select the initial display Caller ID DID name or CO line name by Station or System Programming You can modify the logged numbers for callback purpose Please refer to Section 4 5 4 Call Log
28. or Alarm 10 10AM User Manual only one time Alarm Not Stored daily 445 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Unanswered Timed Reminder Alert PT only If an extension user has not responded to the wake up call the Alert button assigned on the Alert Extension light turns red The Alert button can be used to confirm the not responded room number and to call back the room To confirm the extension which did not answer the timed reminder alert Display PT CLR is displayed co Press Alert Press CLR to clear Alert Unanswered a D extension number To call the unanswered extension Alert GI Lift the handset or press Press Alert SP PHONE MONITOR 446 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions e The system clock must be set correctly beforehand e There is no limit to the number of the extensions who can set the Timed Reminder at the same time e Only the latest time setting is valid at the extension whether it was set by the extension user Timed Reminder or by the Manager extension or an Operator Timed Reminder Remote Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information date time extension number start answer no answer It is programmable to be printed out when the Timed Reminder starts and the alarm is answered or not answered Please refer t
29. 2 WAY TRANS CLR lt PT Display Example gt 2 WAY TRANS XXXX CLR Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL Voice Mail extension number STORE Pr TORE Enter the Voice Mail aioli extension number 3 or 4 digits e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode xxxx VM extension number e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM t Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 User Manual 525 DSS Console Features 5 2 21 Voice Mail VM Transfer Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a VM Transfer button This allows you to record a conversation into your own mailbox Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL DSS A r A To Cc Voice Mail extension oO number STORE Press the desired Press STORE DSS or PF button Enter the Voice Mail extension number 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display Exampl
30. AUTO DIAL Dial 1 or 2 Press STORE 1 to select the Ring Calling Tone Call mode 2 to select the Voice Calling mode e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt e When Ring Calling Tone Call mode is selected Tone Call When Voice Calling mode is selected Voice Call To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is Ring Calling Tone Call User Manual 85 Station Programming 2 2 8 Live Call Screening LCS Mode Set Assigns whether the recording message is monitored through the built in speaker Hands free mode or an alert tone is sent Private mode while incoming callers are leaving a message in the called extension s mailbox Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Coe oo STORE Dial 1 or 2 Press STORE 1 for the Hands free 2 for the Private mode e The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt When the Hands free mode is selected Hands free When the Private mode is selected Private To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is Hands free mode 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Vo
31. Alert Button Assignment 60 Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as an Alert button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL 9 L7 Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 97 Press STORE button you wish to assign as the Alert button STORE lt PT Display Example gt ALERT The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual Station Programming Answer Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as an Answer button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Press the desired Flexible Dial 94 Press STORE CO DSS PF button you wish to assign as the Answer button lt PT Display Example gt Answer The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 61 Station Programming Conference CONF Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as a Conference CONF button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 0 AUTO DIAL Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 70 Press STORE DSS PF button you wish to assign as the Conference button STORE l
32. Before utilizing this feature Trunk to Trunk Restriction should be enabled by System Programming You can store the telephone number up to 24 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 and PAUSE PAUSE can also be stored by dialing x This feature does not apply to the unscreened transfer call Programming Guide References 2 3 Numbering Plan Call FWD Do Not Disturb Set Cancel 2 4 Class of Service COS Call FWD to CO TIE Time Limit of Outside Calls Trunk Group Setting Call FWD Follow me 2 5 System Timer Call Forwarding No Answer Time Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time CO to CO Line Call Duration Time 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature FWD DND lamp pattern 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key Call Forwarding No Answer Time 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features 184 e Limited Call Duration User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 1 8 Ringing Features Do Not Disturb DND 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding 3 1 TIE Line Features e TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND e 4 3 83 VPS Integration User Manual 185 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 10 Call For
33. Extension NEXT DSS a e c m e Dial the desired extension Press NEXT S3 Enter the hour Enter the minute For AM Dial 0 number 3 or 4 digits or 01 through 12 00 through 59 For PM Dial 1 press DSS flexible butto lt PT Display Example gt Extension xxxx xxxx extension number Time hh mm AM PM 0 1 Daily Y N 1 0 CoJo _ al cDa For one time alarm Dial O Si s3 D Hang up or press For daily alarm Dial 1 tone and dial tone SP PHONE Press PROG S3 You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared x2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled User Manual 439 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting gt R Timed Remind SELECT MODE a Co Lift the handset Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT or press Feature Access is R Timed Remind SP PHONE displayed is displayed DSS EN eE w e CO Dial 1 Dial the desired extension Enter the hour Enter the minute For AM Dial 0 number 3 or 4 digits or 01 through 12 00 through 59 For PM Dial 1 press DSS flexible button l hp l Lo Jela i 5 or G 6wa For one time alarm Dial 0 Confirmation Hang up or press For daily alarm Dial 1 tone and dial tone SP PHONE You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is
34. INTERCOM Button RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume REDIAL Button TRANSFER Button FLASH Button PROGRAM Button HOLD Button VOLUME Control Button Microphone AUTO DIAL STORE Button SP PHONE Button AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button 26 User Manual DPT Overview KX T7230 PROGRAM Button Display Liquid Crystal Display Flexible CO Buttons with 16 characters 2 line readout Outside lines 01 through 24 Shows the date time dialed number or name call duration time etc In MESSAGE Button Programming mode it shows the Programming instructions FWD DND Button Soft Buttons CONF Button S1 through S3 INTERCOM Button SHIFT Button TRANSFER Button REDIAL Button PAUSE Button FLASH Button VOLUME Control Button HOLD Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button Microphone AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button SP PHONE Button User Manual 27 DPT Overview KX T7235 Function Buttons Display Liquid Crystal Display F1 through F5 with 24 characters 6 line readout Shows the date time dialed number or PROGRAM Button name call duration time etc In Programming mode it shows the MESSAGE Button Programming instructions FWD DND Button Function Buttons F6 through F10 CONF Button 8 INTERCOM Button SHIFT Button Soft Buttons S1 through S3 REDIAL Button Flexible CO Buttons Outside lines 01 through 12 FLASH Button TRANSFER Button HOLD Button PAUSE Button Microphone VOLUME Control Button SP PH
35. Installation Manual References e 2 7 3 DPH Card KX T96161 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Doorphone Call Door Open e 2 5 System Timer Door Opener Time e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key e 4 5 Doorphone Destination Day Night Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Door Opener 1 12 Conversation Features e Doorphone Call User Manual 253 Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 254 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 30 Electronic Station Lockout Allows you to lock your extension so that other users cannot make outgoing CO calls from your extension Locking PT and SLT same code g 4 gt 7 6 2 lock code lock code Lift the handset or press Dial 762 Enter a 3 digit lock code Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 000 through 999 twice and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Locked No XXX lock code Unlocking PT and SLT S gt 714121 cba Lift the handset or press Dial 762 Enter the same lock code Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR
36. KX T7230 only User Manual 411 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 4 Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear The Manager and the Operators can clear the Live Call Screening password of any extension Programming cs KEES Press PROGRAM Dial 99 Dial 03 e You are in the Station lt PT Display Example gt Programming mode lt PT Display Example gt EXT NO gt PT PGM Mode AUTO DIAL extension no or STORE Dial the extension number Press STORE 3 or 4 digits or X extension number to clear one extension x to clear all extensions lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights 1234 Cancel Conditions e Ifthe extension users forget their pre set password they can ask the Manager or an Operator to clear the password User Manual References e 4 3 43 Live Call Screening LCS 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 412 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 5 Local Alarm If a system error is detected during on line communication mode the Alarm light on the Manager extension turns red The Manager can confirm the error message by pressing the red lit Alarm button If a major error occurs minor
37. NEXT DISA User Code 7 4 COS no oO GE 2 Enter a DISA Press gt Enter a COS number Press STORE Enter the desired User Code 1 through 96 C location number 01 through 32 SELECT e To delete the current entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR Press NEXT or and enter the new number PREV or SELECT lt To end gt aa Press END Conditions e The KX TD500 System can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS level for each Each code should be unique User Manual References e 4 3 26 Direct Inward System Access DISA 144 User Manual User Programming Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 1 TIE Line Features e TIE Line Service Programming Guide References e 5 9 DISA TIE User Code User Manual 145 User Programming 146 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Section 4 Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual 147 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 1 Before Operating 4 1 1 Before Operating What kind of telephone do you use 148 In this manual you will find your way to operate the feature depending on the telephone you use Please use the proper operation for your telephone If you use single line devices such as a Single Line Telephone or data terminal you will follow the steps which enter the feature number e Ifyou use a dial
38. Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling PT and SLT hy ip D CELEO D Eb Lift the handset or press Dial 7310 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt C Waiting Off To talk to the new party by terminating the current call While hearing a Call Waiting tone CO INTERCOM DN L9 E O a or LJ or E a Press the flashing CO or Talk to the Hang up Lift the handset Talk to the new caller INTERCOM or DN new caller The current call is disconnected The current call is disconnected 212 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To talk to the new party by holding the current call While hearing the Call Waiting tone and the CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator is flashing rapidly HOLD CO INTERCOM DN 9 D o OA o E a Press HOLD Press the flashing Talk to the CO or INTERCOM or DN new caller The current call is placed on hold If both the current call and new call are extension calls you will be connected to the new caller simply by pressing HOLD While hearing a Call Waiting tone 4 hy i ni g L9 ia GCO J h R Flash the Confirmation tone Dial 50 Dial tone Hang up Lift the Talk to the switchhook and dial tone handset new caller The current call is placed on hold User Manual 213 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions e BSS OHC
39. Station Programming 2 2 Station Programming 2 2 1 Bilingual Display Selection Allows you to select the display in English or French Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Le lle Lidel Dial 82 Dial 1 or 2 Press STORE 1 for the English display 2 for the French display STORE The display shows the current display type e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is English display mode 56 User Manual Station Programming 2 2 2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Allows you to select the call waiting tone type Tone 1 or Tone 2 Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 5s 1 2 AUTO DIAL STORE Dial 1 or 2 1 to select Call Waiting Tone 1 2 to select Call Waiting Tone 2 Press STORE The display shows the current tone type The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions The tone type patterns are described in Section 6 Appendix e The default is Tone 1 User Manual 57 Station Programming 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 58 Each Flexible CO DSS PF button on your PT and DSS Console can be assigned as various
40. Tone v BA K Press Tone S2 Ringback tone e Ring Calling mode is established PT and SLT If the extension you are calling is in Voice Calling mode you hear a confirmation tone 9 Ringback tone e Ring Calling mode is established Conditions e PT Mode Selection You can select either to be ring signaled or voice signaled by Station Programming The default is Ring Calling mode e Any extension PT SLT user can use this feature during an intercom call if the other party is a PT extension e Ifthe party you are calling is using a Single Line Telephone SLT only Ring Calling mode is available e One time switching You can switch the desired calling mode only once during a call e Voice signaling is not available in the following cases if the other extension is an SLT if the other extension is busy on another call if another call is ringing on the other extension 164 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Alternate Calling Ring Voice e Inter Office Calling 1 9 Answering Features e Hands free Answerback User Manual References e 2 2 7 Intercom Alert Assignment e 4 3 40 Hands free Answerback e 4 3 42 Inter Office Calling User Manual 165 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 4 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation
41. VOLUME Hee e You may also adjust the speaker volume while listening to the background music BGM On mode receiving a voice call receiving a page or hearing a call progress tone such as a dial tone User Manual 45 DPT Overview 1 1 7 LED Indication 46 The Light Emitting Diode LED buttons indicate the line conditions with lighting patterns Flashing light patterns Slow flashing 60 flash minute Moderate flashing 120 flash minute LI LI Rapid flashing 240 flash minute E E L a LED Indication on the INTERCO lt M Button The table below shows the lighting patterns for intercom line conditions INTERCOM button Intercom Line Condition Off Idle Green On Intercom call Conference established Green slow flashing Intercom call hold Green moderate flashing On exclusive hold Consultation hold Green rapid flashing Incoming intercom doorphone call LED Indication on the CO Button The table below shows the lighting patterns for CO line conditions User Manual DPT Overview CO Button CO Line Condition Off Green On Green slow flashing Green moderate flashing Green rapid flashing Red On Red slow flashing Red rapid flashing Idle You are using the line You have a held call You have one of the following 1 Exclusive hold 2 CO to CO line call or 3 Conference unattended Privacy Release possible Hold Recall Inc
42. optional The CO indicator light turns steady green Retrieving an intercom call an outside call held at another extension PT and SLT At another extension l pear 5 1 holding extension no ie Lift the handset or press Dial 51 Dial the holding Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR extension number optional 190 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Placing a call on exclusive hold During a conversation HOLD fo Cc e The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light nl flashes green moderately Press HOLD Press HOLD again e The current call is placed on exclusive hold Confirmation tone optional The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light flashes green slowly e The current call is placed on hold Retrieving a call on exclusive hold CO INTERCOM DN or LL or AA The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light turns steady green Press the CO or INTERCOM or DN e You can talk to the held party again that is on exclusive hold Conditions e Music on Hold Music on Hold is sent to the party on hold if available e What if a call on hold is not retrieved If a call intercom outside on hold is not retrieved in a specified period of time Hold Recall Time ringing or an alarm tone is sent to the extension user who held the call as a reminder Hold Recall tone If the extension user is on hook and its speaker phone PT only is off when the Hold Recall Ti
43. 1 3 System Features e Walking Station User Manual References None User Manual 405 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features 4 4 1 Operator Manager Service Features An extension assigned as the Manager or an Operator by System Programming has the ability to perform the following special features a Background Music BGM External b Call Log Incoming Log Lock c Live Call Screening Password Clear d Local Alarm Indication Manager only e Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback f Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control g Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once h Remote Station Lock Control i Switching COS j Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call k Trunk Busy out setting 1 Trunk Route Control Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Manager Extension DN e 3 3 Extension Group FDN Group Type e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Group Type Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Manager Extension e Operator Group 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 406 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 2 Background Music BGM External Allows the Manager and the Operators to broadcast background music BGM in the
44. ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are useful when using the headset or in hands free mode With the ANSWER button you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone With the RELEASE button you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete a Call Transfer This is convenient for the extension users especially operators who handle a large volume of calls PT and DSS Console When a call comes in on your extension ANSWER 2 RELEASE amp Ce Press ANSWER Talk Press RELEASE The call is disconnected You hear no tone Call Transfer PT and DSS Console During a conversation h par extension no or co Press TRANSFER Confirmation Dial the destination Press DSS tone and extension number flexible button dial tone 3 or 4 digits The other party is placed on hold _ Ringing starts at the destination extension RELEASE 2 C Talk Press RELEASE The destination is confirmed The call is transferred before transferring the call This step can be skipped 166 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions PT ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Assignment ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are provided as a fixed button on the KX T7441 DSS Console For other PTs and DSS Consoles these buttons can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming e PT What if the ANSWER button is pressed during a call
45. Call Park Call Park Retrieve 52 00 99 Call Pickup CO Line AX Call Pickup Directed 41 extension no 546 User Manual Appendix Flexible Feature Numbers Feature Default Additional Digits Call Pickup Group 40 Call Pickup Deny set cancel 720 1 0 Call Waiting set cancel 731 1 2 3 0 Calling Line Identification Presentation 711 1 2 CLIP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 59 0 1 2 Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR Data Line Security set cancel 730 1 0 Dial Information CTT code 99 Do Not Disturb DND set cancel 710 1 0 Doorphone Call calling 31 1 8 Doorphone Call door open 55 1 8 Electronic Station Lockout set 762 000 999 twice Electronic Station Lockout cancel 762 000 999 Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel 733 1 0 External Feature Access 6 External Modem Control 791 1 5 Group Login Logout 48 1 0 incoming group Group FWD 714 1 0 source incoming group destination incoming extension group Live Call Screening LCS Password set 799 000 999 twice Live Call Screening LCS Password cancel 799 000 999 Log In Log Out 45 1 0 Message Waiting set cancel 70 1 extension no 0 extension no Message Waiting call back 70 2 Night Service set cancel 78 0 4 Operator Call 0 Other PBX 01 16 00 99 Outgoing Message OGM recording playback 36 1 2 1 8 Outward Dialing Local
46. Conditions e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override and Secret Busy Override in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension users who can perform this feature e This feature does not work if Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security is set at either one of two extensions or both of them e Party A and Party B are in conversation This feature works as follows so that both party A and party B do not know that their conversation is being monitored by Party C The display and LED indicator at party A and party B show the status of a 2 party conversation A confirmation tone is not sent to either party A or party B even if itis enabled by System Programming The speech path from the party C to the party A and party B is not connected e If either one of two extensions or both of them is released from the call to perform other operations such as making a call or placing it on hold this feature is terminated and then a reorder tone is sent to the calling extension Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Data Line Security Set Cancel Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Busy Override Deny Secret Busy Override e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Featu
47. DN EXT No 1 Group No EXT No 2 DN Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 A Floating Directory Number FDN is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension User Manual 79 Station Programming EXT No 2 Group No Two Way Transfer Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Two Way Transfer button This allows you to record a conversation into a desired mailbox Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Voice Mail Oo 9 EE extension no Press the desired Flexible Dial 91 Enter the Voice Mail Press STORE CO DSS button you wish extension number to assign as the Two Way 3 or 4 digits Transfer button STORE The STORE indicator lights lt PT Display Example gt The display shows the initial programming mode 2 WAY TRANS CLR lt PT Display Example gt 2 WAY TRANS xxxx CLR xxxx VM extension number To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You cannot e
48. Floating Station in the Features Guide User Manual 387 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call park Retrieve e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 6 External Paging Tenant No FDN Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Floating Station 1 5 Attended Features e Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS User Manual References None 388 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 79 Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail Allows you to record a conversation into your mailbox or the desired mailbox Recording into your mailbox During a conversation Two Way Rec CT Press Two Way Record flexible button The Two Way Record indicator light turns red Stopping recording Two Way Rec Press Two Way Record flexible button again e The Two Way Record indicator light turns off t Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 User Manual 389 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Recording into the mailbox of another extension During a conversation Two Way Tran DSS Press Two Way Transfer Enter an exte
49. From Ext1234 RNV DE PST1234 Complete to set Call Forwarding Follow Me FWD NA Ext3456 RNV SR PST3456 Complete to set Call Forwarding No Answer Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button FWD NACO 91234 RNV SRLR 91234 Complete to set Call Forwarding No Answer to Outside Line Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button FWD Cancel E1234 ANNUL RNV P1234 Cancel Call Forwarding Follow Me All Calls at another extension FWD DND Cancel ANNULER RNV NPD Cancel Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb DND Gone Home Gone Home Absent Message 2 Group Page 01 RECHERCHE GR 01 Access to Paging Group to a particular paging group Group Page All RECH GR TOUS Access to Paging Group to all paging groups Handset COMBINE Volume Control handset on handset mode Headset CASQUE Volume Control headset on headset mode User Manual 541 Appendix English Display French Display Description In a Meeting In a Meeting Absent Message 6 Locked NO 123 CODE VERR 123 Complete to set Electronic Station Lockout Log Locked 123 REG FERME 123 Complete to set Call Log Lock Incoming Message Cancel MESSAGE ANNULE Cancel Absent Message MODEM command 1 COMMANDE MODEM 1 Complete to send an AT Command to the ex
50. No Held Call Conditions e Up to 800 calls can be parked at the same time in the system Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed each tenant can use up to 100 parking areas 00 99 independently e Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved in a specific period of time Call Park Recall rings back the extension who parked the call e Automatic Disconnection If a parked call is not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the parked call Eliminating the tone is programmable e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Park Call Park Retrieve e 2 5 System Timer Call Parking Recall Time e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve User Manual 195 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Call Park 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 5 Party User Manual References e 4 3 22 Conference 5 Party e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 196 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 13 C
51. Select Ring Line Preference Incoming Pref Out CO 02 SOR PREF LR 02 Select Prime Line Outside Line Preference Outgoing 544 User Manual Appendix Examples in Station Programming mode English Display French Display Description Pref Out ICM SOR PREF INTCM Select Prime Line INTERCOM Preference Outgoing Pref Out Idle SOR PREF LIB Select Idle Line Preference Outgoing Pref Out No SOR PREF NON Select No Line Preference Outgoing Save SAUVEGARDE SAVE button is assigned Tone Call APPEL TON Select Ring Calling mode Tone Type 2 TON TYPE 2 Select ringing tone for a CO button or intercom calls TRK GRP 03 GR LR 03 Group CO G CO button is assigned VTR 1010 TMV 1010 Voice Mail VM Transfer button is assigned Voice Call APPEL VOCAL Select Voice Calling mode 092 555 2111 092 555 2111 One Touch Dialing button is assigned Conditions e Ifthe displayed characters exceed 16 digits amp is shown at the right hand edge e The duration time display is only shown when you make or receive an outside call Count start time for outgoing calls can be programmed as desired e When you confirm key programming be sure to press a button while on hook If the Full One Touch Dialing feature is set dialing mode will start when pressing PF Programmable Feature DSS Direct Station Selection SAVE or REDIAL but
52. Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Data Line Security Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option User Manual 235 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line Data Line Mode Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting 1 12 Conversation Features e Data Line Security e Privacy Release User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 4 3 63 Privacy Release e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 236 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 26 Direct Inward System Access DISA Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system A DISA outgoing message is used to give outside callers assistance such as listing the extension numbers in the system You can also reach extensions using a single digit DISA built in auto attendant number Calling an extension From Outside Telephone In Non Security Mode Trunk Security Mode fh Dial the DISA Ringback
53. feature buttons such as an Account Button FWD DND Button etc The features assignable are limited by the button type Please refer to Flexible Buttons in Section 1 1 4 Feature Buttons The Flexible CO Button Assignment by User or System Programming can be used for this assignment Account Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as an Account button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL oc Le Press the desired Flexible CO DSS Dial 6 Press STORE PF button you wish to assign as the Account button STORE lt PT Display Example gt Account e The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual Station Programming Alarm Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as an Alarm button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL STORE Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 77 Press STORE button you wish to assign as the Alarm button lt PT Display Example gt ALARM The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e Alarm button is available for the Manager only User Manual 59 Station Programming
54. oPER0 PREV FLASH END NEXT N oA co co ca ca co C3 C ca co co Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT D D C C C me me C me C C me me C me me C SECRET PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR J E ABC DEF STORE GHI JKL MNO FLASH SELECT 5 6 Ses i3 i i 8 Co Bae SELECT VOLUME KX T7235 110 co co co co co co co cq co co ROGRAM SHIFT 5 Ge LES DnE GS SECRET PAUSE CLEAR D a 1 CO D oe 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 a Leu GHI 4 kL 5 MNOG amp v STORE prs 7 Ttuv 8 wx 9 E SELECT oPeR0 PREV FLASH END NEXT User Manual User Programming Before entering the User Programming mode Before entering the User Programming mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook and e Nocalls are on hold at your telephone Entering the User Programming mode To enter the User Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Programming Password default 1234 e The display shows the Initial Message SYS PGM NO Notes e If nothing is entered within five seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed
55. set cancer Dial your extension number MENU PREV NEXT Second Display FWD BSY NA FWD CO TIE Line FWD From FWD From Cancel FWD NA CO TIE MENU PREV NEXT Press the PREV S2 or NEXT S3 button to go to the first display Call Forwarding No Answer to CO TIE Line Sets forwarding all incoming calls to an external party when you do not answer Dial line access code 9 77 or 801 through 848 Dial destination phone number and User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 3 Call Information Display KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only When receiving a call from the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls the caller s telephone number and name are displayed simultaneously You can also record the information in the call log 7230 7433 While receiving an incoming CO call the display shows the caller s telephone number and name 0111111111 JOHN WHITE GS FON Off hook You can see the caller s number 0111111111 INFO LOG You can see the Press INFO S1 to see the caller s name SHIFT You can see the caller s name JOHN WHITE INFO LOG Press INFO S1 to see the call duration time You can see the call duration time 10101 12 00 30 INFO LOG Press LOG S2 to record the information You can record the call information in the call log
56. when you go off hook to answer a call Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 2 2 AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE The display shows the current e The STORE indicator lights status e The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt Pref In Ring To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 90 User Manual Station Programming Prime Line Preference Incoming Assignment You are connected to a call on the line assigned as the prime line automatically when you go off hook to answer a call Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Press the desired line access Press STORE button Selection ICM S CO G CO L CO PDN SDN The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial lt PT Display Example gt programming mode Pref In ICM _ When ICM is selected To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Note e If your PT is DN type then you cannot select ICM The display shows the current status User Manual 91 Station Programming 2 2 12 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Allows you to select the desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences a No Line Preference b Idle Line Preference c Prime Line Preference INTERCOM default Foll
57. you used to lock the and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR extension lt PT Display Example gt Unlocked Conditions How does this feature restrict the extension This feature restricts the extension from making an outside call only Other operations are not affected e Remote Station Lock Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout If the Manager or an Operator sets Remote Station Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the extension user cannot unlock it e PT If someone tries to make an outgoing CO call from a locked extension he hears a reorder tone and Restricted is shown on the display User Manual 255 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Station Lock Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line Station Lock Password Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Lock Control 1 6 Originating
58. 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time in the Programming Guide gt If 0 is specified in Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time setting in Section 2 5 System Timer works Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Call FWD to CO TIE in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature Treatment of the forwarded call Toll Restriction Automatic Route Selection ARS and Account Code Entry requirements of the extension in Call Forwarding mode still apply to the call forwarded by this feature If you are storing an account code enter the account code and then the delimiter 99 before the line access code Extension to CO Line Call If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the call duration can be restricted depending on the setting of the system timer lt Section 2 5 System Timer Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt 183 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Co to CO Line Call If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature the call duration is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out Trunk to Trunk Connection
59. 4 3 48 Night Service On Off Allows you to switch the Day Night Lunch Break mode The KX TD500 System supports both the Night and Day modes of operation The Day mode includes the Lunch and Break mode Only a DIL destination can perform in Lunch Break mode And any other feature can perform in Day mode The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be programmed differently in Day and Night modes For example Toll restriction calls can be programmed to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night Switching Day Night Lunch Break mode Display operation 7235 7436 C_ Features Lift the handset or Press Features press SP PHONE For Auto Mode For Day Mode For Night Mode For Lunch Mode For Break Mode For Auto Dial 0 For Day Dial 1 For Night Dial 2 For Lunch Dial 3 For Break Dial 4 D NEXT A Cc Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT until the Night Mode 730 4 Press Night Mode following is displayed ly Confirmation tone and dial tone e The display shows the current mode for five seconds lt PT Display Example gt i Hang up or press SP PHONE Auto Mode or Day Mode Night Mode Lunch Mode Break Mode 304 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Switching Day Night Lunch Break mode Display operation Lift the handset or press SP PHONE For Auto For
60. 448 phantom numbers can be assigned by System Programming e PT The Phantom button cannot be used for feature settings such as Call Forwarding e PT One Touch Transfer by Phantom button If Automatic Hold is enabled by COS programming you can transfer the call without first pressing the TRANSFER button that is simply by pressing a Phantom button e PT An incoming CO call may come in on a Phantom button directly depending on System Programming In this case a CO button S CO G CO or L CO or a PDN button associated with the incoming CO call should be assigned on a PT Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line User Manual 353 Station Features and Operation PT SLT CO Key e 5 3 Phantom Extension Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Phantom Extension 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out 1 10 Holding Features e Automatic Hold For Transfer User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 10 Phantom Button Ringing On Off Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 354 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 62 Pickup Dialing Hot Line You can make a call to the pre programmed party simply by going off hook Programming the phone number PT and SLT rO a 2 phone no
61. 5 DAY NIGHT Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a DAY NIGHT button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL Press the desired Dial 73 Press STORE DSS button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming DAY Night eae To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 510 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 6 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Assignment You can assign the desired extension number to a DSS button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS z AUTO DIAL Q 1 extension no Oo STORE Press the desired Enter the desired Press STORE DSS button extension number 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial EXT programming mode CLR lt PT Display Example gt EXT XXXX CLR xxxx extension number To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual
62. 5 Partyiseciin in ati eee eid R a A A 228 4 3 23 Conference Unattended eeeeessssessseseossossssseserresessesesecescoossesseseosoeesseseeecsssoraessss 231 4 3 24 CTI Computer Telephony Integration Code Entry eee ceeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeees 234 43 23 Data Cine Seriy ehre peponi r on ie erra cuesteneuvetscesues jade TAE a EE ESEA EEE RR 235 4 3 26 Direct Inward System Access DISA ccccecsccessceeseeceneeceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeaaeeeaeeeeeaeens 237 4 3 27 Do Not Distirb DND araous a cinta de ila A Ra 244 4 3 28 Do Not Disturb DND Override cece cccccccessssecessecceseseececeseeeeeceseeeeeesseeeeneeeaeens 248 4 3 29 Doorphone Call sarron erranei oeeo a ei a E EEn AS A DEEE NES EINS 250 4 3 30 Electronic Station LOCKOUt siseses ceeeeseeeseceseceseceseceeeeeseeeseeaecenaeceeeseeeseeseeeeeaees 255 4 3 31 Emergency Call a s icnccite ca iene ieee ian oe ine hate Be an 257 4 3 32 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through cee eeeeeseeseeeeeeenseenseenaeceaeee 258 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override osrin otet bel bi de aN A EEE Na 261 4 3 34 Executive Busy Override Deny 0 eee cescesceseeeeeeseesseecseeceeceseceeeeaeeeeeeeaaessaeens 264 4 3 35 External Feature Access nornen nanena dete de a ee avy eaten 266 4 3 36 External Modem Control 00 cece ceeceseeeseeeeceseceseceeceeeeaeeeseeeseceaaecneesseeeeeeeaaeeaaees 268 ABST Fl hesena nanana e ra ieids E ite cisten Reta agen EAEE 270 4 3 38 Ful One Touch Dialniciar aea
63. 94 Timed Reminder feature in Section 4 3 Station Features and Operation 500 User Manual DSS Console Features Section 5 DSS Console Features Note All illustrations of the DPT paired telephone used in these operating instructions are based on model KX T7235 User Manual 501 DSS Console Features 5 1 Configuration 5 1 1 Configuration With a Directed Station Selection DSS Console you can make or transfer calls and access system features with the touch of a button The DSS Console must be connected to the Panasonic KX TD500 System and paired with a PT Proprietary Telephone System Programming is required to designate the extension number of the paired PT With a paired telephone you can carry out the following operations using the DSS Console e Direct access to an extension Direct Station Dialing e Quick access to an outside party One Touch Dialing e Quick access to a system feature One Touch Access for System Features e Easy transfer to an extension Call Transfer The above functions are enabled simply by pressing buttons on the console which are pre programmed as function buttons by Station Programming Panasonic KX T series DSS Consoles are categorized as follows KX T7240 DSS Console 32 DSS buttons 16 PF buttons KX T7040 KX T7440 DSS Console 66 DSS buttons KX T7441 DSS Console for Attendant 48 DSS buttons ANSWER button RELEASE button Conditions
64. A Calling Party Control CPC signal is an on hook indication sent from a CO line when the other end hangs up You hear a reorder tone when the signal is detected 160 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT An account code can be up to 10 numeric digits 0 through 9 FLASH PAUSE etc are not allowed After entering an account code the delimiter must be entered Memory Dialing An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing One Touch Dialing System Station Speed Dialing The sequence to enter an account code into Memory Dialing is Feature Number Account Code Line Access Code Phone Number PT Pressing the Account button flexible button while entering an account code cancels the entry SLT You cannot enter an account code during a call or while hearing a reorder tone SLT Flashing the switchhook while entering an account code cancels the entry SLT The delimiter 99 is available for rotary type SLTs only Account button The Account button can be used instead of dialing the feature number It can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming Programming Guide References User Manual 2 3 Numbering Plan Account Code 2 4 Class of Service COS Account Code Mode 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key 5 6 Account Code Tenant No En
65. AG CO button assigned to a DSS button is available for monitoring the call activity only not available for making and receiving a call User Manual 513 DSS Console Features 5 2 9 Group FWD Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Group FWD button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console amp oA Press the desired DSS button Paired telephone lt PT Display Example gt Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL FDN STORE Enter FDN of Incoming Press STORE group 3 or 4 digits The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode G FWD FDN CLR lt PT Display Example gt G FWD FDN xxxx CLR xxxx Incoming group number e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 514 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 10 Live Call Screening LCS Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Live Call Screening LCS button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone oss AUTO DIAL Press the desired Dial 92 Press STORE DS
66. Access ARS 9 Outward Dialing Trunk Group Access 8 01 48 User Manual 547 Appendix Flexible Feature Numbers Feature Default Additional Digits Paging All 32 33 Paging External 32 0 1 2 Paging External Answer TAFAS Answer 42 1 2 Paging Group 33 01 16 Paging Group Answer 43 Paging Deny set cancel 721 1 0 Paralleled Telephone Connection set cancel 39 1 0 Pickup Dialing Hot Line assign set cancel 74 2 phone no 1 0 Quick Dial 1 8 Redial Last Number Remote DND Do Not Disturb set cancel 722 destination extension no Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once 723 destination extension no Station Program clear 790 Station Speed Dialing 3 0 9 Station Speed Dialing programming 30 0 9 phone no Switching COS Primary 792 Switching COS Secondary 793 System Speed Dialing for SLT x 000 999 system speed dial number TIE Line Access 77 Timed Reminder set 761 1 hhmm 0 1 0 1 Timed Reminder cancel confirm 761 0 2 Timed Reminder Remote set 7 1 extension no hhmm 0 1 0 1 Timed Reminder Remote cancel confirm 7 0 extension no 2 extension no Trunk Busy out set cancel 726 1 0 trunk port physical no Trunk Busy out confirm 726 2 trunk port physical no Trunk Route control 724 trunk port physical no UCD Monitor mode set cancel 725 FDN x Walking COS set 47 Walking CO
67. All Logout All extensions in the Extension Group or Incoming Group can be logged out This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 60 Empty Group in the Programming Guide gt If this feature is disabled by System Programming the extension user cannot leave the 295 Station Features and Operation PT SLT group log out At least one extension must be logged in However this does not apply to Auto Logout of the UCD group extensions Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout Group Login Logout e 2 8 System Option Empty Group e 3 3 Extension Group UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor e 3 5 Incoming Group UCD Setting Supervisor Extension e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming Group e Phantom Extension 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 80 UCD Login Monitor e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 296 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 46 Message Waiting When the called extension or phantom extension is busy or does not answer your call you can leave a notification so that the called party may call you back As a message r
68. Answer Follow Me Enter required number O h g Confirmation tone and dial tone g 6b Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Max 24 digits To i utside line ine access phone no geer as to Outside line o Dial 6 to select To Outside Line or to select No Answer to Outside Line Enter line access number 9 or 77 or 801 848 Enter phone number v Gla Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR I es i Dial Confirmation tone and dial tone 179 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling 7436 7235 FWD DND DS D A C FWD DND Cancel Lift the Press FWD DND Press FWD DND Cancel Confirmation Hang up or press handset or tone and SP PHONE Se PHONE From destination Hal one our ko ae gt Press FWD From Cancel Enter your extension number Hang up or press Confirmation SP PHONE tone and dial tone PT and SLT FWD DND For PT ON 2 COCE For SLT pr Lift the handset Confirmation or press For PT Press FWD DND tone and SP PHONE MONITOR For SLT PT Dial 710 dial tone y e You may press the flexible button d G Wa assigned as the FWD DND button instead Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR From destination Ly oe eee cbs Dial 8 Enter your Hang up or press extension number SP PHONE MONITOR 180 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions General Types of calls which are fo
69. Arrive Count Timed Reminder ringing is repeated up to 3 times until the destination extension replies it by default This number of times ranging from 1 to 5 times can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Arrive Count in the Programming Guide gt Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time The interval time between each Timed Reminder ringing is 60 seconds by default This interval time ranging from 20 to 240 seconds can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time in the Programming Guide gt Hardware Requirements for a wake up call To utilize a wake up call DISA card KX T96191 is required OGM Recording To utilize a wake up call set OGM Type of an OGM Group to Wake up OGM Recording can be done only by the Manager or an Operator What if a wake up message is not recorded An alarm tone is heard instead of a wake up message The number of extension users who can set this feature is not limited However the number of extension users who can hear the wake up message at a time is limited to a maximum of 56 per DISA card If the 57th or later extension user goes off hook to hear the wake up message he will hear the alarm tone instead of the wake up message 381 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 afte
70. Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access Group CO G CO button To support efficient utilization of CO lines a group of CO lines trunk group can be assigned to a CO button This button is referred to as Group CO G CO button Any incoming calls from any CO line in the same trunk group arrive at the G CO button To make a CO call you can access an idle CO line in the trunk group by simply pressing the assigned G CO button Conditions e Itis possible to assign the same CO line to an S CO button a G CO button and an L CO button e Itis necessary to program the extension for making or receiving calls or both in trunk groups 36 User Manual DPT Overview e When your extension is assigned as an incoming call destination for a CO line you cannot receive any incoming CO calls unless a G CO L CO or S CO button associated with the CO line is assigned Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 1 1 4 Feature Buttons e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access Loop CO L CO button All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a Proprietary Telephone The assigned button serves as an L CO button An incoming call on any CO line arrives at
71. Call Hold e Call Park 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Hold Recall User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting User Manual 193 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 12 Call Park Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area You can be released from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved from any extension Parking a call PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER For PT Y yY 5 2 parking zone no For SLT L FA For PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone Dial 52 Enter a parking zone For SLT Flash the switchhook and dial tone number 00 through 99 lt PT Display Example gt C Parked at xx L Parking zone number Confirmation tone 00 through 99 and dial tone If you hear a busy tone it indicates the specified parking zone is unavailable lt PT Display Example gt Park at xx N A e You can change the parking zone simply by entering the parking zone number while hearing the busy tone 194 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Retrieving a parked call PT and SLT hy pa ON 5 2 l J You can talk to the party Lift the handset or press Dial 52 Enter a parking zone number Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR 00 through 99 where the call optional is parked e If there is no held call you will hear a reorder tone lt PT Display Example gt
72. Call Screening When the telephone is idle and on hook LCS Press LCS flexible button The LCS indicator light turns off User Manual 285 Station Features and Operation PT SLT In the Hands free mode When callers are connected to your voice mailbox the message recording is monitored automatically through your extension speaker While monitoring in the Hands free mode the LCS indicator light flashes green slowly Having a conversation with a party LCS The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly or Lift the handset E In Keep Recording mode the Two Way Record or press exible button sae E SP PHONE MONITOR indicator turns on Pressing the Two Way Record button cancel the recording and the light turns off Stopping the monitoring LCS Cancel or Press FLASH or LCS Cancel flexible button The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly 286 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT In the Private mode When callers are connected to your voice mailbox an alert tone is sent The LCS indicator light flashes green rapidly when a caller is connected to your voice mailbox When using a Single Line Telephone which is connected with a Proprietary Telephone in parallel you hear ringing Stopping the alert tone LCS Cancel The LCS indicator light turns red from flashin a 5 g or green rapidly Press FLASH Press LCS
73. Cancel e The alert tone stops flexible button Monitoring the recording message INTERCOM ANSWER Lift the handset or press Press the flashing Press INTERCOM Press PDN Press ANSWER SP PHONE MONITOR LCS flexible button The LCS indicator light flashes green slowly To stop monitoring Hang up The FLASH button or the LCS Cancel button can also be used to stop monitoring The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly User Manual 287 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Having a conversation with a party LCS Lift the handset or press Press the flashing SP PHONE MONITOR LCS flexible button The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly e In Keep Recording mode the Two Way Record indicator lights During a conversation with another party When the extension user is having a conversation a call waiting tone is sent The LCS indicator light flashes green rapidly If you want to terminate the current call Monitoring INTERCOM LCS PDN ANSWER cDs r AAJA o AA AJ or Hang up or press Lift the handset or press Press INTERCOM Press LCS Press PDN Press ANSWER SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button An alarm tone is sent Monitoring Starts Having a conversation with a party LCS Lift the handset or press Press the flashing SP PHONE MONITOR LCS flexible button 288 User Manual Station Features and Operati
74. Day Night Lunch Break mode DAY NIGHT button operation 0 For Auto Mode For Day Mode DAY NIGHT 1 cba 2 For Night Mode Lift the handset Press DAY NIGHT 3 or press flexible button SP PHONE 4 MONITOR For Lunch Mode Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE For Break Mode MONITOR For Auto Dial 0 For Day Dial 1 For Night Dial 2 For Lunch Dial 3 For Break Dial 4 e The status of DAY NIGHT indicator DSS button Mode CO button KX T7440 KX T7441 DSS button Others Day Off Off Off Night On Red On Red On Red Lunch On Green On Green Off Break Slow Flash Green Slow Flash Green Off lt PT Display Example gt Auto Mode or Day Mode or Night Mode Lunch Mode Break Mode User Manual 307 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Switching Day Night Lunch Break mode Feature number operation PT and SLT gt Lift the handset or press 0 For Auto Mode Dial 78 SP PHONE MONITOR y ola Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 2 For Night Mode 3 For Lunch Mode Confirmation tone L a For Break Mode and dial tone For Auto Dial 0 For Day Dial 1 For Night Dial 2 For Lunch Dial 3 For Break Dial 4 e The display shows the current mode for five seconds lt PT Display Example gt Auto Mode or Day Mode Night
75. Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt Hold Recall tone Hold Recall tone is generated to the extension user who transferred the call 50 seconds before the time out Hold Alarm tone Hold Alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension user who transferred the call joins the CO to CO call to establish a 3 party conference call CO to TIE call If a CO call is transferred to the destination party via TIE line a CO to TIE call is established and the call duration is restricted by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt PT If you want to join the conversation after transferring the call or while hold recall tone is sent press the corresponding CO button A 3 party conference call is established User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Unscreened To Extension Transfer Recall Destination If the call intercom CO TIE transferred to the destination extension is not answered within a specified period of time lt Section 2 5 System Timer Transfer Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt it may ring an Operator extension instead of the extension who originally transferred it This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 6 Transfer recall destination in the Programming Guide gt When Transfe
76. E E EA 384 4 3 76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry eee eeeeseeeeecneeceeeeneenaeees 385 4 3 77 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing ec eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 386 4 3 78 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 20 0 ceeccecccesseceeceeeeeeceteeeaeceeaeeeeeeeees 387 4 3 79 Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail eeceeceseeeseeereeeseeceseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 389 4 3 80 UCD Login MONtri AE Wie ee ieee das bea readies eae 392 43 81 UCD Monitor Mode eiee eit ae ee nee shee aes 393 4 3 82 Voice Mail Transfer jcc scs cock casein cee ceica roe cvees sn sdiegedehactstvandsreaqibiseedede eatdatoes sestieaccaes 395 4 3 83 VPS Integrationen e erie toned cies tat dota eee eee 397 A 3284 Walking OS ii ra ener ae eat aad ak tase a e A Me eee ee eects 401 43 85 Walking Stati ON nennen 20h casccfhces ae ci zeae deans depend sles eat caarimascizis AEL EER 404 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features sccssssssscssssccssssecsscssscsesssssssssssesssssseses 406 4 4 1 Operator Manager Service Features 0 00 0 ee eeceecceseceneeeseceseceeeceseceeseaeeeeeeeaeeeaaees 406 User Manual 15 Table of Contents 16 4 4 2 Background Music BGM External 000 eee ceccceeneseeeeceeeeeaeeeeaeceeaeeceaeeeeeeees 407 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock ee cesceseseeeeeseeeeeeeseesaeceaeecseceseceeeeaeeeaeenaeessaeees 411 4 4 4 Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear 00 cccccccsccesseceeceee
77. Fae or Whisper OHCA Callback Busy Cancel COS Primary ext COS Secondary ext Call Park MENU PREV NEXT Dial 1 through 3 or 0 Places a call on hold in a parking ooo area or retrieves it di See the next page 1 to set Call Waiting 2 to set OHCA 3 to set Whisper OHCA Dial parking 0 to cancel Off zone number 00 through 99 oo On hook dim 4 4 Gl f gt gt Automatic Switching COS Callback Busy Operator manager only Cancel Refer to the corresponding Cancels the setting feature in Section 4 4 which reserves a Operator Manager Disy liina Service Features a J J On hook qe User Manual 479 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Fourth Display Data Line Security Refuses or accepts an indication tone e g call waiting tone Dial 1 or 0 Door Opener Unlocks the door 1 Set On 0 Cancel Off On hook GL 480 Background Music External operator manager only Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features MENU PREV NEXT Fourth Display Door Open MENU Data Line On Off Doorphone Call Extrn BGM On Off Extrn MODEM CTL PREV 31 0 31 8 31 8 31 5 NEXT Doorphone Call Call
78. Features e Electronic Station Lockout User Manual References e 44 9 Remote Station Lock Control e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 256 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 31 Emergency Call Allows you to dial out a pre assigned emergency number after seizing a CO line regardless of the restrictions imposed on your extension Up to 10 emergency dial numbers can be stored in the system Dialing PT and SLT h NA i EY Lift the handset or press Dial the line access code Dial tone Dial the emergency number SP PHONE MONITOR 9 or 801 through 848 e You may press a CO button instead Conditions e The emergency number 911 is already stored at the factory System Programming is required to store other emergency numbers e Making an emergency call is allowed even in the following cases in Account Code Verified All Calls Toll Restriction Override mode in any toll restriction level in Electronic Station Lockout Remote Station Lock e If your KX TD500 System is connected to a host PBX as a behind PBX you must dial the host PBX line access code after dialing the line access code and it must be included as the first digit of the emergency number Programming Guide References e 5 4 Emergency Dial Code Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Emergenc
79. Features e End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through User Manual Station Programming Two Way Record Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Two Way Record button This allows you to record a conversation into your own mailbox Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Cc Voice Mail extension no Press the desired Flexible Dial 90 Enter the Voice Mail Press STORE CO DSS button you wish extension number to assign as the Two Way 3 or 4 digits Record button STORE e The STORE indicator lights lt PT Display Example gt e The display shows the initial programming mode 2 WAY REC CLR lt PT Display Example gt 2 WAY REC xxxx CLR xxxx VM extension number e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You cannot enter a non existent extension or floating directory number Please refer to Floating Station of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide e You should use a voice mail extension number that has been assigned by System Programming Please refer to Programming Guide References below Programming Guide References e 1 5 VPS DPT Port Assignment EXT No 1
80. Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 56 Paging Answer Allows you to answer an announced page at any extension within the system Answering a page sent through a built in speaker PT and SLT hy pa Z Gel J Lift the handset or press Dial 43 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR optional Answering a page sent through a particular external pager PT and SLT h DD 2 4 2 external pager no l 2 Lift the handset or press Dial 42 Dial external pager number Confirmation tone Talk SP PHONE MONITOR 1 or 2 optional Conditions e Only extensions within the paged group can answer Paging Group e A confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the page is made Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 2 Tenant Confirmation Tone for Station or External Paging in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Station Paging Answer e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve e 3 4 Paging Group Paging Group No 338 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Extension Group No Features Guide References 1 14 Paging Features e Paging User Manual References e 4 3 55 Pag
81. If a new call comes in while engaged in the current call you can answer it simply by pressing the ANSWER button In this case the current call will be disconnected e PT Delayed Ringing or No Ringing Calls If a call which comes in on the extension is not ringing Delayed ringing or no ring it can not be answered by pressing the ANSWER button Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 5 2 26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation User Manual 167 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 5 Answering Direct Trunk You can answer a CO call by pressing a flashing CO button directly You do not have to lift the handset or press the SP PPHONE MONITOR button To answer an incoming CO call CO Press the CO that is flashing green or red rapidly The indicator light turns green and a hands free conversation is established Conditions e PT You can choose the desired line to answer when more than one call is ringing on your PT by this feature e PT There are three types of CO buttons Group CO G CO button Loop CO L CO button and Single CO S CO button These can be assigned to flexible CO buttons by Sta
82. Lift the handset or press For PT Press AUTO DIAL STORE Enter a system speed dial number SP PHONE MONITOR For SLT PT Dial X 000 through 999 The AUTO DIAL STORE indicator lights The AUTO DIAL STORE indicator e No tone is heard light turns off Conditions e System Speed Dial numbers must be stored either by User or System Programming e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed up to 2000 Speed Dialing codes can be shared among each tenant under the condition of up to 1000 codes per tenant Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Overriding Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing can be activated or deactivated per tenant by System Programming e PT Continuous use of a speed dial number is possible if the number is divided when stored lt Example gt If the number is divided and stored in System Speed Dial numbers 001 and 002 Press AUTO DIAL STORE 0 0 1 AUTO DIAL STORE 0 0 2 You may press a CO button to select a desired CO line before pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button e PT Combination dialing Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing Redial Last Number Saved Number and manual dialing can be used in combination e display PT The dialed number appears on the display e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation 376 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT
83. Mode Confirming the current mode Display PT When the telephone is idle Lunch Mode Break Mode e The display shows the current mode for three seconds lt PT Display Example gt In the automatic case Day Auto or Night Auto Lunch Auto Break Auto In the manual c Day mode Night Mode or Lunch Mode or Break Mode 308 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions Class of Service COS Programming COS programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature By System Programming you can select either automatic Day Night mode switching or manual Day Night mode switching In the automatic case the default start end time for each mode is as follows e Day mode 9 00 a m e Lunch_Start mode 12 00 p m Lunch_End mode 1 00 p m e Break_Start mode 3 00 p m Break_End mode 3 30 p m e Night mode 5 00 p m Any extension user with display PT can confirm the current mode Day Night Lunch or Break The Manager and the Operator can also switch the Day Night Lunch Break mode You cannot switch the selection mode from Night to Lunch or Break There are 2 types of switching modes Auto and Manual The mode is set by the PC programming or by entering the feature number Night Mode Set Cancel or pressing the DAY NIGHT button by allowed ex
84. Out for members of an Extension Group and Phantom Extensions Using the Log In Log Out button Loy Log In Log Out r y Lift the handset or press Press Log In Log Out Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR The Log In Log Out indicator light turns off in Log In mode or turns steady red in Log Out mode User Manual 293 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Log In Log Out for members of an Extension Group and Phantom Extensions Using the feature number PT and SLT Gee 4 5 0 To Log Out G ud rm Lift the handset For Log In mode Dial 451 Confirmation tone Hang up or press or press For Log Out mode Dial 450 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Log in or Log out Group Log In Log Out for members of an Incoming Group Using the Group Log In Log Out button Log In Log Out Lift the handset or press Press Group Log In Log Out Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR The Group Log In Log Out indicator light turns off in Group Log In mode or turns steady red in Group Log Out mode 294 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Group Log In Log Out for members of an Incoming Group Using the feature number PT and SLT Lift the handset or press 4 8 0 To Log O
85. PT FLASH Button Operation Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal or disconnecting the current call This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 3 FLASH button operation while CO talking and 4 FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 in the Programming Guide gt e PT Memory Dialing During outside calls a FLASH stored in System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing works as External Feature Access not as Flash Disconnect Signal e LSLT This feature does not function if an SLT has a call on Consultation Hold Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Feature Access e 2 8 System Option FLASH button operation while CO talking FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 e 3 2 Trunk Group Flash Time Max Dial No after EFA Signal Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Host PBX Access 1 12 Conversation Features e External Feature Access e Flash User Manual References e 4 3 18 Call Waiting from Central Office e 4 3 37 Flash User Manual 267 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 36 External Modem Control Allows you to control the external modem connected to the RS 232C port 1 by sending a pre assigned AT Command for enabling Automatic Answer etc Activating an AT Command to th
86. PT Display Example gt xxxx Free extension number e You hear a ringback tone and the other extension begins to ring automatically Answering a CO line recall PT and SLT If you hear the telephone ringing l S fit R D Lift the handset or press Dial tone Dial the phone number SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt 10101 Free E Trunk port physical number User Manual 171 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling PT and SLT rm N Lift the handset or press Dial 46 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions e If you do not answer the recall ringing within 10 seconds four callback ring signals this feature is canceled automatically e Ifthe called party becomes busy again after the callback ringing starts the ringing stops but this feature will be executed again when the extension becomes free e FWD DND Override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature does not work for the callback ringing It always rings the extension on which this feature was activated e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can cancel this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On e Automatic Route Selection ARS e Trunk Access U
87. SLT e LSLT If a stored feature number includes or rotary or pulse SLTs cannot use it Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant System Speed Dialing Entries Max System Speed Dial TRS Level Override e 2 3 Numbering Plan Speed Dialing System e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Name Number Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 1 7 Dialing Features e System Speed Dialing 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory User Manual References e 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set e 4 3 77 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing e 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory e 45 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory User Manual 377 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 74 Timed Reminder Wake Up Call Allows you to set your extension to sound an alarm once or daily at a preset time Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a reminder When this feature is set an alarm tone will ring for 30 seconds default at the programmed time Wake up call If a voice message is recorded beforehand wake up message is heard instead of an alarm tone when an extension user goes off hook This feature can be activated only once or everyday at a specified time Setting PT and SLT Acs ce e e Li
88. SP PHONE MONITOR light turns green phone number User Manual 151 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Making Outside Calls by Trunk Access Trunk Group Allows you to access an idle trunk line within a designated trunk group PT and SLT CO amp S LL For PT p L 5 ON For SLT PT wy a Gad Lift the handset For PT Press CO assigned Dialtone Dial the Talk Hang up or press or press as Group CO phone number SP PHONE SP PHONE MONITOR For SLT PT Dial 8 and the trunk MONITOR group number 01 through 48 The display shows the phone number e The selected CO indicator light turns green Making Outside Calls by Trunk Access Individual Trunk Allows you to select the desired trunk line without dialing the line access code 2 bs Lift the handset Press CO assigned as Dialtone Dial the phone number Talk Hang up or press or press Single CO SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR e The display shows the phone number e The selected CO indicator light turns green Conditions o gt EE There are three types of Line Preference for outgoing calls Idle Line No Line Prime Line Each preference can be selected by Station or System Programming e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can make an inter office call using the Call Directory Extension Dialing display operation e Inter digit Time When you make an outside call using an ISDN PRI23
89. Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 8 Ringing Features e Timed Reminder Wake Up Call e Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call User Manual References e 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set e 44 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback e 4 4 11 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call User Manual 383 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 75 Toll Restriction Override There are two types of toll restriction override Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry e Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 384 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Allows you to temporarily override toll restriction and make a toll call from a toll restricted telephone You can carry out this feature by entering an appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number For operation procedure please refer to Section 4 3 2 Account Code Entry Conditions e This feature changes the toll restriction level of the extension to that of the account code entered This can be used by extension users assigned to restriction levels 2 through 6 Level 1 cannot be changed e A Class of Service which is assigned to the Account Code Mode Verified Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their toll restrictions e Up to 1000 account codes can be programmed for the Verified mode e If you do not enter an account code or you
90. To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 518 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 14 One Touch Access Assignment for System Features You can assign the desired feature number to a DSS or PF button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS PF AUTO DIAL n m o feature no G STORE Press the desired Enter the desired Press STORE DSS or PF button feature number lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode CLR e Up to 24 digits can be stored e If you wish to access the Station paging answer feature enter the feature number 43 To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 519 DSS Console Features 5 2 15 Release Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a Release button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS PF AUTO DIAL el o EA a STORE Press the desired Dial 95 Press STORE DSS or PF button lt PT Displa
91. V Control button CONT e The display shows lt Example gt 2 Contrast contrast level 3 A one v When using the headset The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a Proprietary Telephone PT When you use the headset optional you should switch the selection mode first Selection is explained in Section 2 2 5 Handset Headset Selection To change to the headset mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 9 2 STORE PROGRAM Changing the ringing tone of a CO button INTERCOM button There are eight ringer frequencies available for each CO Group CO Loop CO Single CO button DN PDN SDN button and INTERCOM button If you wish to change them please refer to Section 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons or Section 2 2 14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button Volume Control Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker Allows you to adjust the following volumes as necessary Handset Receiver volume level 1 through 3 Headset volume level 1 through 3 Ringer volume level 0 through 3 Speaker volume level 1 through 12 User Manual 43 DPT Overview If your Digital Proprietary Telephone is provided with a display display DPT the volume level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks For ringer volume adjustment three levels OFF LOW HIGH are available with the KX T7220 and KX T7250 To adjust the handset receiver volume
92. Waiting Another Extension Phantom Extension Button k One Touch Dialing Button 1 Release Button m SAVE Button n Single CO S CO Button 0 Tone Through Button p Two Way Record Button q Two Way Transfer Button r Voice Mail VM Transfer Button e PF buttons can be changed to any of the following feature buttons by Station User or System Programming a Account Button b Answer Button c Conference CONF Button d FWD DND Button e One Touch Dialing Button f Release Button g SAVE Button e When the STORE button is pressed after programming you will hear beep tones as follows One beep The entry is changed from one that was stored previously Two beeps The entry is the same as one stored previously Programming Guide References e 4 4 DSS Console Paired Extension DSS Key PF Key 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 Can only be assigned by System Programming 528 User Manual DSS Console Features Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features DSS Console User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment User Manual 529 DSS Console Features 5 2 22 Direct Station Dialing An extension can be called and accessed simply by pressing a DSS butt
93. When the problem is solved the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display Displaying an error message When the Alarm button turns red Alarm Press the red lit Alarm flexible button lt PT Display Example gt ERR 20211DISCNCT Clearing the error message While the error message is displayed Alarm Press the red lit Alarm flexible button lt PT Display Example gt WED JAN 1 10 40A Date and Time display Conditions e Alarm button assignment Alarm button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on PT by Station User or System Programming e Alarm LED indication Major alarm Priority 1 Red moderate flash Minor alarm Priority 2 Red On e If multiple errors occur at a time only the error with highest priority will be displayed by pressing the red lit Alarm button User Manual 415 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Local Alarm User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 416 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback The Manager and the Operators can record and play back outgoing voice messages Recording a message 7235 7436 Cc Features Lift the handset or press SP PHON
94. XDP eXtra Device Port expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two telephones For more details please consult your dealer 346 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 60 PDN Call If an SDN button which corresponds with the PDN of another extension is assigned on your PT you can call that extension with a simple operation Making a PDN call N Gla Lift the handset or Press an idle SDN Dial tone Press the same Talk Hang up or press press flexible button SDN again SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR Se SDN 2 g The SDN indicator light turns green User Manual 347 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Screened Call Transfer During a conversation TRANSFER Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone and dial tone e The other party is placed on consultation hold SDN o gt Wait for an answer Press the same SDN again Unscreened Call Transfer During a conversation hy TRANSFER 9 Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone and dial tone e The other party is placed on consultation hold Press an idle SDN flexible CO button M SDN qe Cl Press an idle SDN Dial tone flexible CO button e The SDN indicator light turns green Eba Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 2 Announce The call is transferred SDN g Eba Press the Hang up or press same SDN SP PHO
95. access code G IRR d For PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation Press CO or enter Dial the phone Ringback tone Hang up or press For SLT Flash the switchhook tone and a line access code number where SP PHONE dial tone 9 or 77 or 801 through calls will be MONITOR 848 transferred The current call is placed on hold e The call is transferred Conditions General Music on Hold or Ringback Tone If Music on Hold is enabled music is sent to the caller while being transferred It is system programmable whether to send a ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller lt Section 2 8 System Option Sound source during transfer in the Programming Guide gt PT If you mis dial the destination telephone number press the FLASH button to clear the number entered Then you can enter a new number again PT If you want to return to the held call press the TRANSFER or corresponding CO INTERCOM DN button before the destination party answers the transferred call SLT If you want to return to the held call press the switchhook lightly Screened Unscreened to Extension User Manual One Touch Transfer by DSS Button PT only Allows the PT user to transfer the outside call CO TIE to an extension simply by pressing the DSS button associated with the destination extension This feature can be enabled or disabled on a system wide basis by System Programming lt Section 2 8 Sy
96. an existing intercom call Extension 7230 7235 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom outside call Mp Grae Y A three party conference is now established Press Over S2 Confirmation tone optional PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call h rt A three party conference 2 is now established Confirmation tone optional User Manual 261 Station Features and Operation PT SLT To terminate one party and talk to the other CO INTERCOM A or U Press CO or INTERCOM Confirmation tone of the party to remain connected optional To leave the conference H The other two parties Gla continue their conversation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions General 262 Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent this feature from being executed by another extension user This feature does not work if Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security is set at either one of two extensions or both of them Confirmation tone When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties This tone can be eliminated by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 8 Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Pr
97. announcement Unscreened to Extension Transfers a call to the extension or the external party without a While listening for the ringback tone after dialing the destination number you can replace the handset Transferring a call to an extension Screened PT and SLT During a conversation For PT OR l For SLT DSS a a TRANSFER extension no For PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation Dial the destination Ringback For SLT Flash the switchhook tone and extension number tone dial tone 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button The other party is placed on hold 204 Wait for Announce Hang up or press an answer SP PHONE The call is transferred User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Transferring a call to an extension Unscreened PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER y FA For PT For SLT For PT Press TRANSFER For SLT Flash the switchhook Confirmation tone and dial tone The other party is placed on hold extension no OR DSS fp n wr y Eba Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button Ringback tone The call is transferred Ringing starts at the destination extension Transferring a call to the Remote Resource Unscreened PT and SLT During a conversation For PT Press TRANSFER For SLT F
98. automatically forwarded to your mailbox e Callers can leave messages in your mailbox according to the Voice Mail guidance 397 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling PT and SLT FWD DND Ny For PT 4 XD EC Co ie EO O is aba Lift the handset or press For PT Press FWD DND Dial 0 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR For SLT PT Dial 710 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR You may press the flexible button lt PT Display Example gt assigned as the FWD DND button FWD DND Cancel instead Listening to a stored message You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox easily There are two operations to play back messages Using the Message Waiting MESSAGE button If there is a message in the mailbox the MESSAGE indicator light is on MESSAGE tY Lift the handset or press Press MESSAGE SP PHONE MONITOR e You can listen to the stored message 398 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Manual dialing PT and SLT Q Voice Mail extension no t s Lift the handset or press Enter the Voice Mail extension number SP PHONE MONITOR 3 or 4 digits e You can listen to the stored message by following the Voice Mail guidance Conditions e Outside callers can leave their messages in your mailbox When an incoming CO call arrives the Operator answers the call and transfers it to your extension And If y
99. cleared 2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled lt PT Display Example gt Alarm 01 00AM 440 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting gt R Timed Remind St Lock abcabc A MENU SEL cc e Lift the handset Press SHIFT Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL or press until FEAT is R Timed Remind is SP PHONE displayed at the arrow DSS O E e BS w oe Dial the desired extension Enter the hour Enter the minute For AM Dial 0 number 3 or 4 digits or 01 through 12 00 through 59 For PM Dial 1 press DSS flexible button ly A g Gl Pie Lo Jela For one time alarm Dial 0 Confirmation Hang up or press For daily alarm Dial 1 tone and dial tone SP PHONE You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared 2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled lt PT Display Example gt Alarm 01 00AM User Manual 44 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting PT and SLT o CA eee o Lift the handset Dial 7 1 Dial the desired extension Enter the hour or press number 3 or 4 digits or 01 through 12 SP PHONE MONITOR press DSS m RO e Enter the minute For AM Dial 0 For a one time alarm Dial 0 Confirmation Hang up or press 00 through 59 For PM Dial
100. confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT Speak with the third party through microphone e The caller s number and name are shown on the display for five seconds in 10 seconds intervals lt PT Display Example gt 123 Tony Caller s extension number e You can talk to two parties individually 312 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands free mode 7130 7235 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT D gt t Gw gt Hang up 1 4 Speak with the third party through microphone e The current call is disconnected e You can talk in hands free e The INTERCOM indicator light mode turns green To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in handset mode 7130 7235 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT INTERCOM Cs LL a Press INTERCOM Talk e The current call is disconnected The INTERCOM indicator light turns green e You can talk in handset mode User Manual 313 Station Features and Operation PT SLT To talk to the third
101. during a DISA call The action taken by the system depends upon System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 14 Dialing in DISA CO to CO talking in the Programming Guide gt If Disconnect and make a new call is selected then the system will disconnect the current call and prepare for a new call Otherwise the will be transmitted down the line to the other party e Intercept Routing The Floating Number of a DISA OGM Group can be selected as the destination of Intercept Routing e What if the destination extension is busy If the destination extension has enabled Call Waiting then he will hear the Call Waiting tone Otherwise the caller may hear a busy tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 17 Destination Busy DISA in the Programming Guide gt e What if an illegal number is dialed The caller may hear a reorder tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 21 Illegal Number DISA in the Programming Guide gt e How many times does the IRNA destination ring This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Call Forwarding No Answer Time in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 e 2 6 3 RMT Card KX T96196 e 2 6 4 ERMT Card KX TD50197 User Manual 241 Station Features a
102. e The DSS Console and the PT should be placed side by side on your desk e Up to 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to a PT e A Single Line Telephone cannot be paired with the DSS Console e For System Programming please refer to the Programming Guide of the KX TD500 System Programming Guide References e 4 4 DSS Console Paired Extension DSS Console 1 8 Port No DSS Console 1 8 Model DSS Key PF Key 502 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 1 2 Location of Controls KX T7240 KX T7040 DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field BLF 01 through 32 Used to access extensions The BLF indicates the busy or idle status of each corresponding extension in the system These buttons can also be changed to other function buttons PF Programmable Function Buttons 01 through 16 These buttons are provided with no default settings With a paired telephone you can program the buttons as other function buttons lt Back View gt TO EMSS Used to connect to the KX TD500 System User Manual 503 DSS Console Features KX T7440 KX T7441 DSS Buttons with DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field BLF 01 through 66 Busy Lamp Field BLF 01 through 48 ANSWER Button RELEASE Button Connection Connect to the KX TD500 Included telephone System line cord 504 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 1 3 Feature Buttons DSS Consoles have the following types of Feature But
103. e The display shows the initial programming mode G FWD FDN CLR lt PT Display Example gt G FWD FDN xxxx CLR xxxx Incoming group number To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You cannot enter non existent extension or a floating directory number Please refer to Floating Station of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide Programming Guide References e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Group Type A Floating Directory Number FDN is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension 66 User Manual Station Programming Group Log In Log Out Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as a Group Log In Log Out button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Press the desired Flexible Dial 79 Enter FDN of Incoming Press STORE CO button you wish to group 3 or 4 digits assign as the Group Log In Log Out button e The STORE indicator lights lt PT Display Example gt The display shows the initial programming mode G Login FDN CLR lt PT Display Example gt G Login FDN xxxx CLR xxxx Incoming group number To erase an incorrec
104. each operation and illustration Use the new programmed number if you have changed a flexible feature number The lists of fixed numbers and default flexible feature numbers are shown in Section 6 Appendix If you use a dial pulse DP type Single Line Telephone SLT It is not possible to access features that have X or in their feature numbers User Manual Introduction Illustration All illustrations of DPTs used in the operating instructions are KX T7235 s Tones Various tone types such as Confirmation tone Dial tone Call Waiting tone etc are explained in Section 6 Appendix Display The display examples are in each operation step if required The display information list is in Section 6 Appendix for your convenience Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Jnstallation Manual are noted for your reference Programming Guide References The related and required programming titles described in the Programming Guide are noted for your reference System Programming should be done with PC Features Guide References The related feature titles described in the Features Guide are noted for your reference User Manual References The operation s required to implement the feature described in this User Manual is are noted for your reference Note e Throughout this manual the term he or she his or her may be used In order to improve reada
105. enter an invalid account code standard toll restriction is in effect Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Account Code e 2 4 Class of Service COS Account Code Mode e 5 6 Account Code Tenant No Entry No Code TRS Level Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Account Code Entry 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction e Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry User Manual References e 4 3 2 Account Code Entry User Manual 385 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 77 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Allows you to cancel toll restriction in System Speed Dialing Normally calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the extension s toll restriction level Once this option is set it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialing calls with no restrictions You can override toll restriction for System Speed Dialing through System Programming Conditions e Tenant Service This feature can be activated or deactivated on a tenant basis by System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant System Speed Dial TRS Level Override Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction e Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 1 7 Dialing Features e System Speed Dialing User Manual References e 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing 386 User Manual Station Featur
106. entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press NEXT OF PREV or SELECT Press END Conditions e There is maximum of eight location numbers Quick dial 1 8 A maximum of 24 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and keys and the FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons can be assigned to a quick dial number e Before programming this program a feature number for each location should be programmed by System Programming lt Section 2 3 Numbering Plan in the Programming Guide gt User Manual 141 User Programming Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Quick Dialing 142 User Manual User Programming 3 2 10 010 DISA TIE User Code Set Description Used to program a list of up to 32 DISA TIE User Codes Each code is appended with a COS level Selection e Location number 01 through 32 e DISA TIE User Code 4 through 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e COS number 1 96 Default All locations Blank All COS 96 User Manual 143 User Programming Programming Display PT PI eo Dial 010 Press NEXT Enter a location number 01 through 32 lt PT Display gt lt PT Display gt To enter location number 1 you 010 DISA CODES Location NO gt gem alse ipress NIET lt PT Display Example gt 1 Not Stored lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed p STORE
107. errors will be neglected and only the first major error message will be displayed The second error will be neglected if the error priority is the same as the first one Please refer to Section 5 Troubleshooting in the Installation Manual for further information on error messages Error Message List Priority order Error Message Description Priority Alarm LED ERR CLCK IC Calendar IC failure 1 ERR DC DOWN DC power down 1 B B S FAN FLT Basic shelf fan alarm 1 E E S1 FAN FLT Expansion shelf 1 fan alarm 1 E E S2 FAN FLT Expansion shelf 2 fan alarm 1 E B S OVER HEAT Basic shelf heat alarm 1 E E S1 OVER HEAT Expansion shelf 1 heat alarm 1 E E S2 OVER HEAT Expansion shelf 2 heat alarm 1 E ERR TSW DWN TSW clock down 1 B ERR BAT ALM CPU RAM battery alarm 1 A ERR AC DOWN AC power down 2 B ERR xyy CRD ERR Option Card failure 2 A ERR xyy DISCNCT Card disconnect 2 B ERR xyy DTR AIS Digital trunk AIS reception 2 D ERR xyy DTR FRM Digital trunk frame failure 2 D ERR xyy DTR RAI Digital trunk RAI reception 2 D ERR xyy DTR SYC Digital trunk out of 2 D synchronization ERR xyy LPR RAM Option Card RAM failure 2 A ERR xyy LPR ROM Option Card ROM failure 2 A ERR xyyzZ MODEM Modem failure 2 A ERR xyy OGM LOS DISA OGM is lost 2 C ERR xyy OPX POW OPX power failure 2 C ERR SMDR Printer is not connected 2 B User Manual 413 S
108. extension outside after transferring it to the destination if the destination extension is idle This feature simplifies the transfer operation by eliminating the need for going on hook or pressing the RELEASE button after transferring the call This feature is convenient for extension users such as Operators who handle a large volume of calls PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER Mp Co ForPT aie T For SLT For PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone Dial the destination For SLT Flash the switchhook and dial tone extension number 3 or 4 digits The other party is placed on consultation hold e Ringing starts at the destination extension s e The call is transferred Conditions e Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature e Released Link Operation functions when transferring a call to the ordinary extensions or floating extensions extension group incoming group phantom extensions e If the destination party is busy Camp on Transfer is set by going on hook e SLT The SLT extension user cannot establish a conference call if Released Link Operation is enabled by System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Released Link Operation Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Released Link Operation 364 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT
109. extension number 76 PDN SDN Delayed Ringing 0 through 4 delayed ringing type 77 Alarm None 78 Tone Through None 79 Group Log In Log Out 3 through 4 digits FDN of Incoming group 8 Voice Mail Transfer 3 through 4 digits VM Extension number 90 Two Way Record 3 through 4 digits VM Extension number 91 Two Way Transfer t 3 through 4 digits VM Extension number 92 Live Call Screening None 93 Live Call Screening Cancel None 94 Answer None User Manual User Programming Button Code Parameter 95 Release None 97 Alert None 98 Group FWD 3 through 4 digits FDN of Incoming group Loop CO None Group CO 01 through 48 trunk group number CO INTERCOM ringer frequency 1 through 8 ring tone type number Phantom ringing on off 1 off 2 on Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 Default For all PTs CO button 1 Loop CO Ring tone type 2 Others Not Stored User Manual 127 User Programming Programming Display PT KEKEKE a4 Dial 005 Press NEXT Enter an extension number 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display gt lt PT Display gt e To enter the lowest extension 005 FLEXIBLE CO EXT NO gt
110. failure should occur Your KX TD500 System enables conversations between specific CO lines and extensions Power Failure Transfer and supports system data backup Power Failure Transfer Specific extensions are automatically connected straight to specific CO lines This provides CO line conversations between the pre assigned extensions and CO lines e All other conversations are disconnected during a power failure e Digital Proprietary Telephones DPTs cannot be used during a power failure SLTs can work in the event of a power failure e When power is restored after a power failure your system automatically re starts operation maintaining as much of the previous system data as possible Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Nothing is heard in the hands The Headset mode is When the headset is not used set free mode selected the mode to Handset Refer to Handset Headset Selection in Station Programming Section 2 or DPT Overview Section 1 The unit does not ring e The CO button is not e Assign the CO button assigned e Increase the Ringer Volume e The Ringer Volume is set Refer to DPT Overview to OFF Section 1 The display flashes the The system internal clock Consult with an authorized following message does not work properly Panasonic Factory Service Center THU JANO1 12 00A User Manual 553 Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company Division of Mats
111. flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For User Manual 549 Appendix example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 e Fixed Feature Numbers Type 1 or Type 2 can be selected by System Programming Default Type 1 Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Attribute DN e 2 3 Numbering Plan e 2 8 System Option Fixed Feature Number Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Flexible Numbering User Manual References None 550 User Manual Appendix 6 1 3 Tone List lt TONE gt Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 Do Not Disturb DND Tone CO CO Line Call Limit Warning Tone User Manual 551 Appendix lt TONE gt lt 15 S Call Waiting Tone 1 outside intercom Call Waiting Tone 2 outside Call Waiting Tone 2 intercom Hold Alarm Tone lt RING TONE gt Outside Calls Outside Call Hold Recall Intercom Calls Intercom Call Hold Recall Doorphone Calls Timed Reminder Callback Ringing Camp on Recall 552 User Manual Appendix 6 1 4 Troubleshooting If a power
112. following reasons The extension has been locked by the owner Electronic Station Lockout or the operator manager Remote Station Lock Control The extension is restricted by the account code mode Verified All Calls or Verified Toll Restriction Override Account Code Entry The extension is restricted from making toll calls Toll Restriction The same CO line can be assigned to an S CO button and a G CO button The same trunk group can be assigned to more than one G CO button Each PT can have more than one L CO button Ringing Tone Selection The Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT user can choose a desired ringing frequency for each S CO G CO or S CO button lt Section 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons in the User Manual gt Idle Line Preference Outgoing PT only If a CO button S CO G CO or L CO is selected in Idle Line Preference Outgoing setting by Station or System Programming the PT user can get an idle CO line simply by going off hook Automatic Callback Busy Camp On If the CO line which you try to access is busy the system will inform you when the CO line becomes free Hands free operation When you press a CO button S CO G CO or L CO button directory the hands free operation mode is established and can perform on hook dialing User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Idle Direct Automatic Route Selection ARS Trunk Access Idle
113. forwarded to pre assigned extension All Calls automatically regardless of the status of your extension Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to the pre assigned extension Busy when your extension is busy Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to the pre assigned extension No Answer when you do not answer the call within a pre determined time Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to the pre assigned extension Busy No Answer when your extension is busy or you do not answer the call within a pre determined time Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to the pre assigned external to CO or TIE Line party via a CO or TIE line regardless of the status of your extension The telephone number of the external party must be assigned beforehand The call duration is limited Some extensions may be restricted from setting this feature Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to the pre assigned external No Answer to CO or TIE Line party via a CO or TIE line when you do not answer the call within a pre determined time The telephone number of the external party must be assigned beforehand The call duration is limited Some extensions may be restricted from setting this feature Call Forwarding If you forget to set the Call Forwarding All Calls feature Follow Me before leaving your desk you can set the same feature from the destination extension
114. free dialing operation PAUSE Button Inserts a pause in speed dial numbers or in One Touch dial numbers PROGRAM Button Used to enter or exit the Programming mode 32 User Manual DPT Overview REDIAL Button Used for the Last Number Redialing SELECT Button Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed phone number SHIFT Button U S U S Jsed to access the next level of Soft Button functions oft S1 through S3 Buttons sed to perform the function or operation that appears on the bottom line of the display P PHONE Speakerphone Button Used for a hands free speakerphone operation TRANSFER Button Transfers a call to another extension or external destination VOLUME Control Button Used to adjust the volume of the handset receiver headset ringer and speaker it also adjusts the display contrast Please refer to Section 1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series User Manual 33 DPT Overview Flexible Buttons Flexible Buttons do not have specific features permanently assigned to them Features are assigned to Flexible Buttons by Station User or System Programming Flexible Button Assignment is addressed in Station Programming The three types of Flexible Buttons are as follows e Flexible CO buttons located on PT only Flexible DSS buttons located on DSS Console only e Flexible PF Programmable Feature buttons located on PT DSS Console only The following table outl
115. functions are in parentheses During Normal Operation PAUSE PROGRAM SP PHONE REDIAL AUTO ANSWER MUTE FLASH TRANSFER FWD DND CONF INTERCOM AUTO DIAL STORE HOLD Up Down JOG User Manual During Programming PAUSE PROGRAM NEXT PREV PREVIOUS SELECT FLASH CLEAR gt SECRET STORE END Skip Skip 109 User Programming Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 and KX T7235 in the programming mode KX T7431 is the same as KX T7433 except for the Soft and SHIFT buttons SELECT KX T7433 Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT D D gt D C C C PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR D me mt i oa ABC DEF STORE 2e am TINO FLASH SELECT 6 a SELECT VOLUME U KX T7436 r PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT i D l ES D J a J a Ia J om ra 1a J a J a hO Ja Ja Ja a 1a 1a al 1a JCE J a O 1a a 1a 1a J SECRET PAUSE CLEAR O 1a Ia 1 E 1 asc 2 DEF 3 a Koti GHI 4 KL 5 MNO6 amp v STORE prs 7 Tuv 8 wx 9 SELECT
116. hear a confirmation tone Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller two way and the third party one way ola Hang up Speak with the third party through microphone The current call is disconnected e You can talk in hands free e The INTERCOM indicator light mode turns green To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in handset mode 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call you hear a confirmation tone Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller two way and the third party one way INTERCOM FLASH 9 m m a Press INTERCOM Press FLASH The current call is disconnected e You can talk in handset mode The INTERCOM indicator light turns green 318 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call you hear a confirmation tone Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller two way and the third party one way HOLD 9 E z Press HOLD Talk e The current call is placed on hold The INTERCOM indicator light flashes green slowly Conditions e This feature can be enabled to any PTs other than KX T7400 series PT by System Programming e Whisper OHCA is activ
117. lt Example gt To select Beth To select Panasonic System Speed Dialing Bob KME ROFE E Jim Ko Panasonic 1 Makes a call to a party stored in Rana tae Police ss 1 the system using the directory oo Oo Zangril Louisa Nancy Home lt Example gt MENU NEXT To select Jack 9 123 4567 9 987 6543 Si 9111111 SE 55 55550 93333333 9 999 97777777 9 4444444 10 9 1000001 MENU NEXT Adam Alice Carol Ann Parker Casey Ben Johns Ched Ely Beth Chris PREV NEXT VOU UOO00 UO DOO Harry Jack Henry Janny Hiroshi Jimmy Isaac John UOOO0 UOOOO Ivy s shop Johes MENU PREV NEXT Extension Dialing System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing 1 Press the Extension F3 or SYS Speed F9 1 Press the STA Speed F8 button button 2 Press the Function button which is next to the 2 Press the Function button which is next to the desired name or number desired alphabet To alternate the display between name and 3 Press the Function button which is next to the number press the NEXT S3 button desired name Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment DN User Manual 475 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 2 8 System Option Station Speed Dialing Initial display e 4 3 Extension Line Name e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Name Number Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e One Touch Dialing e
118. may continue their conversation If both other two parties are on outside lines they will be disconnected To terminate one party and talk to the other hy CO INTERCOM DN a E U or LL or LT amp Press the CO or INTERCOM or DN Confirmation tone of the party to remain connected optional e A conversation with the desired party is established and the other party is disconnected e This operation is available only when the extension user established the conference call by using two different line access buttons Not available when only one button is used To talk to the third party while holding the original party fo TRANSFER J L9 amp Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone Talk to the third party optional If both other two parties are extensions the INTERCOM or PDN indicator light flashes green moderately 224 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To talk to the original party while holding the third party 2 ai Flash the switchhook Confirmation tone Talk to the original party optional To put both parties on hold Press HOLD e For an ICM type PT this operation is available only when at least one party is on a CO line e For a DN type PT this operation is available only when the extension user established the conference call using two different line access buttons Not available when only one button is used Conditions e Conference call arrangem
119. not operate properly check the Digital Super Hybrid System and the internal extension wiring Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps and motors The unit should be kept free of dust moisture and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight Do not use benzine thinner or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe it with a soft cloth Do not use any handset other than a Panasonic handset When you ship the product Carefully pack and send it prepaid adequately insured and preferably in the original carton Attach a postage paid letter detailing the symptom to the outside of the carton DO NOT send the product to the Executive or Regional Sales offices They are NOT equipped to make repairs Product service Panasonic Factory Servicenters for this product are listed in the servicenter directory Consult with your authorized Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit You should note the model number and the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL No SERIAL No User Manual Cautions For your future reference DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS DEALER S TE
120. number you can also press NEXT f lt PT Display Example gt PT PGM Mode e To program another CO button of the same extension port Repeat these steps co batt d i STORE utton code arameters E Press CO which is changed Enter a button code Enter parameters if required Press STORE to another button e The display shows the contents e To change the parameter press CLEAR pre assigned to the button and enter the new parameter lt PT Display Example gt CO 10101 e To program another extension port SELECT fo extension no Press SELECT Enter an extension number Go to Repeat these steps 3 or 4 digits above lt To end gt Press END 128 User Manual User Programming Canceling Display PT KEKEKE a4 Dial 005 Press NEXT Enter an extension number 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display gt lt PT Display gt e To enter the lowest extension number you can also press NEXT lt PT Display gt PT PGM Mode 005 FLEXIBLE CO EXT NO co A Press CO which is changed Press STORE Press END to another button The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button lt PT Display Example gt CO 10101 Conditions e The number of the CO buttons available for each PT varies depending on the telephone type lt Section 1 16 Button Features Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Co
121. of calls put in the waiting queue Setting gt PRE Lift the handset or press Dial 725 Enter the FDN for a UCD SP PHONE MONITOR Group 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display Example gt UCD Monitor STRT Canceling C z 2 5 x y m Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt WAIT CALL 10 as the number of waiting calls e Monitoring the number of UCD calls waiting is started Gb Lift the handset or press Dial 725 X Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt UCD Monitor End Conditions e Monitoring the number of UCD calls waiting is canceled e Any extension user whether a member of the UCD Group or not can be specified as the Supervisor extension for a UCD Group by System Programming e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation User Manual 393 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e When this feature is started for Incoming Group members not only the number of calls put in the waiting queue but also Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan UCD Monitor Mode e 3 3 Extension Group Group Type UCD Setting Supervisor Extension e 3 5 Incoming Group Group Type
122. office through the external pagers Setting Canceling 7235 7436 Cc Features Lift the handset or press SP PHONE y Ga Hang up or press SP PHONE Confirmation tone and dial tone User Manual Press Features D A co Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT until the following is displayed Extrn BGM On Off Press Extrn BGM On Off e Pressing this button alternates between On and Off modes e The display shows either one of the following depending on whether the BGM is on or off lt PT Display Example gt External BGM On or External BGM Off BGM is on BGM is off 407 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP PHONE Feature Access is displayed y Gad Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE 408 Rotate Jog Dial until Ext BGM On Off is displayed gt Ext BGM On Off SELECT MODE E Press SELECT e Pressing this button alternates between On and Off modes The display shows either one of the following depending on whether the BGM is on or off lt PT Display Example gt External BGM On BGM is on or External BGM Off BGM is off User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling NN gt Ext BGM On Off Extrn MODEM 1 5 MENU SEL eT N E O a
123. port physical number lt PT Display Example gt e When setting B Out 10201 When canceling B Out Cancelled User Manual To set c BSY Out Set PHY Press BSY Out Set To cancel gt BSY Out Cancel PHY Press BSY Out Cancel y Ga Hang up or press SP PHONE 449 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling SELECT MODE EA Lift the handsetor Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT press SP PHONE Feature Access the following is is displayed displayed SELECT MODE E Press SELECT trunk port physical no v Gba Enter the trunk port Confirmation tone Hang up or press physical number and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt e When setting B Out 10201 When canceling B Out Cancelled 450 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling Lift the handset or press SP PHONE To set To cancel User Manual Press SHIFT until FEAT is displayed gt BSY Out Set BSY Ovr DNY 1 0 MENU SEL gt ee oa o Press SEL BS Out Cancel BSY Out Confirm MENU SEL C EC SS SD Press SEL Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until the following is displayed trunk port physical no Enter the trunk port Confirmation tone physical number and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt e When setting B Out 10201
124. second Wait for an answer and talk Answering a doorphone call PT and SLT When you hear the doorphone ring tone at the extension Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR 250 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Calling a doorphone PT and SLT I P GI ey Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR Dial 31 Enter a doorphone number Confirmation tone 1 through 8 lt PT Display Example gt Doorphone x ___ doorphone number 1 through 8 To unlock the door from an assigned extension PT and SLT 7 2 gt D 2P EE oo z Lift the handset or press Dial 55 SP PHONE MONITOR Enter a door opener number Confirmation Hang up or press 1 through 8 tone and dial SP PHONE MONITOR tone The door is left unlocked for the pre programmed amount of time default 5 s lt PT Display Example gt Door 1 Open Lo door opener number User Manual 251 Station Features and Operation PT SLT To unlock the door while talking to the visitor at the doorphone from any extension 7230 7235 7433 7436 hy mem he 5 Sal J ai Press OPEN S3 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE The door is left unlocked for the pre programmed amount of time default 5 s lt PT Display Example gt Door 1 Open door opener number Hang up or press Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR The door is left unlocke
125. selected at 3 in the Programming Guide gt e Flash Time The flash time must be assigned as required by the Central Office e LSLT This feature does not function if an SLT has a call on Consultation Hold Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Feature Access e 2 8 System Option FLASH button operation while CO talking FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 e 3 2 Trunk Group Flash Time User Manual 217 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting from Central Office 1 12 Conversation Features e External Feature Access e Flash User Manual References e 43 35 External Feature Access 218 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 19 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP When you make an outside call through an ISDN line you can let the other party see your pre assigned identification number You can select to show an identification number assigned for an ISDN line or your extension This is one of the ISDN supplementary service To select a CLIP number for an outside line PT and SLT AN race ee ee Lift the handset or press Dial 7111 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt CLIP CO To select a CLIP number for an extension PT and SLT hj Q ie amp CCEC J Lift the handset or p
126. shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Please refer to Combination Table 1 and Combination Table 2 in Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only for information on how to enter each character Conditions e Upto 10 characters can be stored 102 User Manual Station Programming Combination Table Each character can be entered by using the dial key pad various buttons or the Jog Dial for storing names Combination Table 1 shows the combination of the keys and the number of times to press the SELECT AUTO ANSWER MUTE button or the combination of the key and the SHIFT and Soft buttons to enter each character The AUTO ANSWER MUTE button becomes the SELECT button when using the overlay To enter a character find the key and number of times to press the SELECT button or the corresponding SHIFT and Soft button combination from the table Press the corresponding key first then press the SELECT button the required number of times Or you can use the SHIFT button and a Soft button S1 through S3 instead of the SELECT button Combination Table 2 shows the combination of keys and the number of pulses to move the Jog Dial click tones to the right To enter a character find the key and number pulses to rotate the Jog Dial Press the corresponding key first then rotate the Jog Dial the required number o
127. the L CO button unless there are S CO or G CO buttons associated with the CO line or unless the button is already in use To make a CO call you simply press the dedicated L CO button Pressing the L CO button provides the same operation as dialing the feature number for Local CO Line Access ARS default 9 Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual 37 DPT Overview User Manual References e 1 1 4 Feature Buttons e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access 38 User Manual DPT Overview 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series The Jog Dial can be used for the display contrast and the volume control Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired The contrast or the volume level will change as follows Left A N Right counterclockwise clockwise Level decreases Level increases Display Contrast Adjustment The MODE button and the Jog Dial for KX T7431 users and a Soft button and the Jog Dial for KX T7433 and KX T7436 users are used to adjust the display contrast The contrast level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks KX T7431 1 While on hook MODE 1 Press the MODE button six times e The display shows 2 lt Example gt Wie Contrast contrast level 3 2 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desi
128. the ringer volume REDIAL Button AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button HOLD Button FLASH Button Jog Dial SP PHONE Button Microphone User Manual DPT Overview KX T7425 Flexible CO Buttons PROGRAM Button Outside lines 01 through 24 FWD DND Button CONF Button AX S QIY Z INTERCOM Button ayy CS S KS SEX ee Q S N 7 Cis RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume REDIAL Button IS AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button HOLD Button FLASH Button SP PHONE Button Jog Dial Microphone 22 User Manual DPT Overview KX T7431 Display Liquid Crystal Display With 16 character 1 line readout Flexible CO Buttons Shows the date time dialed number or name Outside lines 01 through 12 call duration time etc In Programming mode it shows the programming messages PROGRAM Button SELECT Button FWD DND Button MODE Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button INA SA A PAUSE Button Y S g LLL KS TRANSFER Button SSS SIRS A S Se MESSAGE Button S GF GS AUTO DIAL STORE Button gs j AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Jog Dial SP PHONE Button Microphone User Manual 23 DPT Overview KX T7433 Display Liquid Crystal Display With 16 character 3 line readout Flexible CO Buttons Shows the date time dialed number or Outside lines 01 through 24 name call duration time etc In Programming mode it shows the PROGRAM Button programming m
129. to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it in two speed dial numbers The line access code should be stored in the first speed dial number To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt lt Program 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set is used to name the speed dial numbers CO line access code must be placed before placing secret dial code S or User Manual References User Manual 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing 119 User Programming 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set The KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 and KX T7235 show the stored name during System Speed Dialing Selection e Speed dial number 000 through 999 e Name 10 characters max Default All speed dial numbers Not Stored 120 User Manual User Programming Programming Display PT Lo JLo L2 Dial 002 lt PT Display gt Press NEXT lt PT Display gt 002 SYS SPD NAME SPD Code Repeat these steps name Enter a name speed dial no Enter a speed dial number 000 through 999 e To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT lt PT Display Example gt 000 Not Stored lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed Press STORE e To delete the current entry press CLEAR
130. warning tone is sent to both parties 15 seconds before the time limit at 5 second intervals During a CO to CO line call the caller can prolong the duration of the call by pressing any dialpad key except The amount of prolonging is determined by System User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer DISA Prolong Time in the Programming Guide gt If this parameter is set to zero the caller cannot prolong the call duration The caller can repeat the prolonging operation 10 times or without limit depending on the System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 13 DISA prolonging operation in the Programming Guide gt e To detect the end of a CO to CO line call CPC Signal Detection and Tone Detection can be assigned Tone Detection The following three ways of Tone Detection are provided lt Section 3 2 Trunk Group in the Programming Guide gt to disconnect a CO to CO line call 1 Cyclic Signal Detection Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects a cyclic signal during a CO to CO line call by DISA or AGC 2 Continuous Signal Detection Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects a continuous signal during a CO to CO line call by DISA or AGC 3 Silence Detection Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects no signal during a CO to CO line call by DISA or AGC e DISA Call Re try by Pressing The key can be entered
131. when Dial 702 Talk SP PHONE MONITOR a message has been received at your extension e The message waiting notification is cleared after the conversation One of the dial tones Please refer to Section 6 1 3 Tone List Clearing all message waiting notifications left on your extension PT and SLT with Message Lamp h pd gt ie o o your extension no cba Lift the handset or Dial tone 4 when Dial 700 Dial your extension Hang up or press press a message has been number SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR received at your extension All message waiting notifications are cleared One of the dial tones Please refer to Section 6 1 3 Tone List User Manual 299 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions The system supports a maximum of 448 simultaneous message waiting notifications If you try to set the 449th message you will hear a reorder tone Callback Order If multiple message waiting notifications are left at your extension callback is executed in the order received If you select a specific message to call back callback is executed in the order received starting with the one selected Hardware Requirements To utilize the SLTs with Message Lamp SLC M card KX T96175 or an ESLC card KX TD50175 is required Turning off the light Either the message sender or the receiver can turn off the light PT MESSAGE button If a MESSAGE button is not provide
132. within five seconds optional e A three party conference is now established To terminate one party and talk to the other CO INTERCOM PDN a o AA or A Press CO or INTERCOM or PDN of the desired party User Manual 357 Station Features and Operation PT SLT The CO button pressed to join the conversation needs to be assigned as a Single CO S CO Conditions s PT button PT After the user presses the CO button the CO indicator light of the other extension flashes rapidly for only 5 seconds Pressing the CO button again gives you an additional 5 seconds e PT x PT This feature overrides Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party conference call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party e Data Line Security e Privacy Automatic e Privacy Release User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 358 User Manual Station Features and Operation P
133. 08 Absent Messages Set Description Used to program the absent messages An absent message if set by the extension user is displayed on the display of calling extension s PT to show the reason for the user s absence Selection e Message number 1 through 9 e Message 16 characters max Default Will Return Soon Gone Home At Ext 2 Back at Out Until Ina Meeting through 9 Blank not stored NWN BP WN User Manual 137 User Programming Programming Display PT Lo JLo Ls Dial 008 lt PT Display gt Press NEXT lt PT Display gt 008 ABSENT MSG MSG NO gt Repeat these steps message Enter the message Press STORE message no Enter a message number 1 through 9 To enter message number 1 you can also press NEXT lt PT Display Example gt MSG1 Will Return lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed e To delete the current entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new message lt To end gt L Press END 138 f NEXT SELECT message no Enter the desired message number 1 through 9 Press NEXT or PREV or SELECT User Manual User Programming Conditions e There isa maximum of nine messages Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed Each message has a maximum of 16 characters
134. 1 For a daily alarm Dial 1 tone and dial SP PHONE MONITOR tone You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled lt PT Display Example gt Alarm 01 00AM 442 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling 7235 7436 ZON D NEXT c Remote Timed Reminder A Features Lift the handset or Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press Press Remote Timed Reminder press SP PHONE NEXT until the following is displayed lt PT Display Example gt Extension el a ee sm sa SO wm Bb Press CLR S2 Confirmation tone and dial tone Dial the desired extension Press NEXT S3 number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder lt PT Display Example gt Extension 1234 GW Time hh mm 07 00 AM PM 0 1 0 Hang up or press the Daily Y N 1 0 SP PHONE User Manual 443 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP PHONE Feature Access is displayed DSS T Dial the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder lt PT Display Example gt Alarm Cancelled FEAT A co Press SHIFT until FEAT is displayed Lift the handset
135. 101 Single CO S CO button is assigned Conference CONFERENCE Conference CONF button is assigned 1400 CO Lock 1400 LR VERR Complete to lock the outside calls of other extension Remote Station Lock Control 1400 ICM Lock 1400 INTCM VERR Complete to lock the intercom calls of other extension Remote Station Lock Control 1400 Unlock 1400 DEVERR Cancel Remote Station Lock Control Ext 1234 PST 1234 DSS button is assigned FWD DND RNV NPD FWD DND button is assigned Hands free Off MAINS LIB NON Disable Full One Touch Dialing mode Hands free On MAINS LIB OUI Enable Full One Touch Dialing mode Handset COMBINE Select Handset mode Headset CASQUE Select Headset mode 10101 lt gt EXT1001 10101 lt gt PST1001 Confirm jack number and extension number Loop CoO BOUCLE DE LR Loop CO L CO button is assigned Message Waiting MESS EN ATTENTE Message Waiting Owner Extension button is assigned MW 1234 MW 1234 Message Waiting Another Extension Phantom Extension button is assigned DAY NIGNT JOUR NUIT Day Night button is assigned Not Stored NON MEMORISE No programming is assigned Pref In CO 02 ENT PREF LR 02 Select Prime Line Outside Line Preference Incoming Pref In No ENT PREF NON Select No Line Preference Incoming Pref In Ring ENT PREF SONN
136. 20 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Playing back a message 7235 7436 D NEXT A c C_ Features Lift the handset or press SP PHONE Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT until the following is displayed AUTO DIAL OGM Group no STORE Enter OGM Group number 1 through 8 Press STORE or wait until playback is finished Confirmation tone Confirmation tone and dial tone OGM Playback 31 8 Press OGM Playback y G3 Hang up or press SP PHONE The STORE indicator light turns off lt PT Display Example gt OGM 1 Play 28 E Time counter seconds The STORE indicator lights e The message is played back and the counter starts User Manual 421 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Playing back a message gt OGM Play 1 8 SELECT MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until OGM Press SELECT press SP PHONE Feature Access is Play is displayed displayed fo p OGM Group no G y STORE G 4 ao Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone Hang up or press number 1 through 8 playback is finished and dial tone SP PHONE e The STORE indicator light turns off lt PT Display Example gt OGM 1 Play 28 L Time counter seconds e The STORE indicator lights e The message is played back and the c
137. 35 While receiving an incoming CO call the display While receiving an incoming CO call the display shows the caller s telephone number and name shows the caller s telephone number and name 0111111111 JOHN WHITE 0111111111 EE JOHN WHITE E Extension STA Speed SYS Speed Features Call Log To answer go off hook I ron 0111111111 INFO LOG To answer go off hook O 0111111111 JOHN WHITE Extension STA Speed Pressing the INFO S1 button provides you To record the information Features SYS Speed Call Log INFO with further information once caller s name twice call duration time To see the call duration time To record the information Note Pressing the SHIFT button before answering a call provides you with more information about the caller CO line number or name or both Operating sequence 1 To answer the call go off hook 2 Press the LOG S2 button to log the information Or press the INFO S1 button repeatedly to see the information in detail You can select the initial display Caller ID DID name or CO line name by Station or System Programming e After going off hook you can press the SHIFT button to change t
138. 43 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling FWD temporarily gt FWD Cancel Once LCS abcabc MENU SEL A oO e Lift the handset or Press SHIFT Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL press SP PHONE until FEAT is FWD Cancel Once is displayed at the arrow destination extension no DSS Ringback tone Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button e Ringing starts at the destination extension 432 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling FWD temporarily PT and SLT S destination extension no e Cie Lift the handset or press Dial 723 Ringback tone SP PHONE MONITOR oss Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button e Ringing starts at the destination extension Conditions e This feature cancels the Call Forwarding feature set at the extension temporarily so that the Manager or an Operator can call the extension user Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Remote FWD Cancel Once Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Feature Control 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding User Manual References e 4 3 9 Call Forwarding User Manual 433 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control The Manager and the Operators can remotely lock or unlock any extension To
139. 511 DSS Console Features 5 2 7 FWD DND Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an FWD DND button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone DSS PF a e E S Press the desired DSS or PF button lt PT Display Example gt FWD DND Paired telephone AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE e The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 512 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 8 Group CO G CO Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Group CO button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS trunk group no Press the desired Enter the trunk group Press STORE DSS button number 01 through 48 AUTO DIAL STORE lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode TRK GRP CLR e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e
140. 7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only Allows you to assign frequently dialed numbers and names to each Function button on your PT For KX T7235 and KX T7436 users To store a number Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 7235 7436 AUTO DIAL Enter the desired number Press STORE extension number phone number etc desired number STORE PT PGM Mode F10 Press Function F1 F10 The STORE indicator lights The STORE indicator light turns off The display shows the initial The display shows the current status programming mode If nothing is stored Not Stored is displayed lt PT Display Example gt 9 123 4567 CLR NEXT Outside number 123 4567 is now programmed Up to 24 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X FLASH PAUSE INTERCOM CT or J secret and CONF hyphen can be stored To store the telephone number of an outside party the line access code 9 or 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit To erase the line press the CLR S2 button To store a name press the NEXT S3 button and go to step 3 in To store a name as described in the following procedure To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 99 Station Programming To store a name Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 7235 7436 NEXT PT PGM
141. 848 Ringback tone DISA outgoing message Dial tone from Central Office Dial tone 3 hy Dial tone 3 DISA user code Enter the pre assigned DISA user code phone no Dial the phone number of the outside party One of the dial tones Please refer to Section 6 1 3 Tone List 238 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Extending the call duration while calling a CO line From Outside Telephone When you make a call to any CO line using the DISA feature the line is disconnected after a pre programmed time default 10 min any key except x Dial any key except after the warning tone Re try From Outside Telephone It is possible by System Programming to dial a different number during a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone Press X You hear a dial tone If you dial X while hearing a DISA outgoing message dial tone or after the DISA outgoing message the call will be disconnected You must dial a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 when calling an outside party Warning for the Direct Inward System Access Users When you enable the CO to CO Line Call feature of Direct Inward System Access DISA function if a third party discovers the password a DISA User Code of the system you have a risk that they will make illegal phone calls using your telephone line and the cost m
142. 9 AUTO DIAL O Press Phantom you Press the same Phantom Dial 1or 2 Press STORE wish to turn On Off the again 1 Ring Off ringing 2 Ring On e The display shows the current status STORE e The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial lt PT Display Example gt programming mode Ring On To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 88 User Manual Station Programming 2 2 11 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Allows you to select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences a No Line Preference b Ringing Line Preference default c Prime Line Preference Follow the corresponding programming procedure according to your selection User Manual 89 Station Programming No Line Preference Incoming Assignment No line is selected when you go off hook to answer a call You must select a line to answer an incoming call Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 2 a AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE The display shows the current The STORE indicator lights status The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt Pref In No To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Ringing Line Preference Incoming Assignment You are connected to a call ringing on your extension automatically
143. 9 Absent MSG On 31 9 MENU SEL BSY Out Cancel PHY BSY Out Confirm PHY BSY Out Set PHY If a parameter is required the feature name and parameter will flash 00000 Enter a parameter E ZON ZON ooo oOo dh gt BSY Out Cancel BSY Out Confirm MENU SEL eS If a parameter is required the feature name and parameter will flash Busy Out Set PHY Busy Ovrd Deny 1 0 C Pickup CO C Pickup Deny 31 0 C Pickup Direct ext 00000 A ongni If a parameter is required the parameter will flash Enter a parameter Enter a parameter if required if required ooo ooo oOo oo oO o 496 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT KX T7431 1 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is displayed 2 Press the SELECT Button Enter the parameter if required Ge 4 On hook if required KX T7433 1 Press the FEAT S3 button 2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow 3 Press the SEL S3 button 4 Enter the parameter if required 5 On hook if required KX T7436 1 Press the Features F4 or FEAT S3 button 2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow 3 Press the SEL S3 button 4 Enter the parameter if required 5 On hook if required System Feature List Notes When using a KX T7436 you can press the Function button F1 through F10 on the sam
144. A Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions Calling extension Called extension Call Waiting setting COS OHCA i OFF ON assignment 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS W OHCA gt Enable BSS OHCA BSS OHCA BSS OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 2 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PTs e The call waiting tone is generated when a CO call a doorphone call is received or when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling e Data Line Security Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on by an extension user PT DN BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT PE Call Waiting Tone Selection For PT users two types of call waiting tones are provided to prevent them from missing the tone A Call Waiting Tone type can be selected either by Station or System Programming e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System O
145. ANSWER MUTE indicator light flashes red slowly Canceling When handset microphone mute is established AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off Conditions e 17436 If you press AUTO ANSWER MUTE button during an OHCA call Handset Microphone Mute mode will be turned on e T7400 If you press AUTO ANSWER MUTE button in Hands free mode Microphone Mute mode will be turned on PT This feature is available for KX T7400 series PT only User Manual 273 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Handset Microphone Mute e Microphone Mute User Manual References e 4 3 47 Microphone Mute 274 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 40 Hands free Answerback You can answer an intercom call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset Setting When the SP PHONE and the AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator are off AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns on Canceling When the AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator is on AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off Conditions PT Ring Voice Intercom Alerting Mode Override This feature overrides the Alternate Cal
146. Assignment e 4 3 83 VPS Integration e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 301 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 47 Microphone Mute During a conversation in the hands free mode you can turn off your PT s microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the room When you activate Microphone Mute you can still listen to your caller s voice but your caller cannot hear your voice Setting During a conversation in the hands free mode AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light flashes red slowly Canceling When microphone mute is established AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE e The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off Conditions e This feature is only available during a hands free conversation e You can hear the other party s voice while your PT is in Microphone Mute mode e This feature is available for the PT with AUTO ANSWER MUTE button only Programming Guide References System Programming is not required 302 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Handset Microphone Mute e Microphone Mute User Manual References e 4 3 39 Handset Microphone Mute User Manual 303 Station Features and Operation PT SLT
147. Day For Night For Lunch For Break Press MODE until Feature Access is displayed For Auto Mode For Day Mode For Night Mode For Lunch Mode For Break Mode Dial 0 Dial 1 Dial 2 Dial 3 Dial 4 Night Mode 0 4 SELECT MODE 6CC Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT Night Mode is displayed If ie uv v Ga Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE e The display shows the current mode for five seconds lt PT Display Example gt Auto Mode or Day Mode Night Mode Lunch Mode Break Mode User Manual 305 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Switching Day Night Lunch Break mode Display operation gt Night Mode OGM Play MENU SS SS sb A Lift the handset or Press SHIFT Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL press SP PHONE until FEAT is Night Mode is at the displayed arrow For Auto Mode For Day Mode y For Night Mode Glia For Tench Mode Confirmation tone Hang up or press For Break Mode and dial tone SP PHONE For Auto Dial 0 For Day Dial 1 For Night Dial 2 For Lunch Dial 3 For Break Dial 4 e The display shows the current mode for five seconds lt PT Display Example gt Auto Mode or Day Mode Night Mode Lunch Mode Break Mode 306 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Switching
148. E Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT until the following is o D c OGM Recording 1 8 NEXT A co Press OGM Recording displayed h Confirmation tone OGM Group no Enter OGM Group number 1 through 8 lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Rec 00 seconds OGM group number selected 1 through 8 Time counter e The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly Recording starts after the confirmation tone AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until playback is finished Confirmation tone Record a message up to 30 seconds 2 AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until a maximum recording time 30 seconds has elapsed e The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red The recorded message will be played back automatically lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Play 28 y Ga Hang up or press SP PHONE Confirmation tone and dial tone The STORE indicator light turns off User Manual 417 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Recording a message Lift the handset or press SP PHONE OGM Group no Enter OGM Group number 1 through 8 Press MODE until Feature Access is displayed Confirmation tone lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Rec 00 Time counter seconds OGM group number selected 1 through 8 OGM Record 1 8 SELECT MOD
149. E m Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT OGM Record is displayed AUTO DIAL 2 Record a message up to 30 seconds STORE Press STORE or wait until a maximum recording time 30 seconds has elapsed e The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red e The recorded message will be played back automatically lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Play 28 The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly Recording starts after the confirmation tone Confirmation tone 418 AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until playback is finished y Ga Hang up or press SP PHONE Confirmation tone and dial tone The STORE indicator light turns off User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Recording a message A Cc Lift the handset or press SP PHONE Press SHIFT until Press FEAT FEAT is displayed OGM Group no Enter OGM Group number 1 through 8 Confirmation tone lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Rec 00 Time counter seconds OGM group number selected 1 through 8 e The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly Recording starts after the confirmation tone AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until playback is finished Confirmation tone Record a message up to 30 seconds gt OGM Record tag 2 Page Deny 1 0 MENU SEL a co A Rotate Jog Dial until OGM Record is at the a
150. E User Code Set To program you need to switch your PT extension to the User Programming mode During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension If you want to make a normal call operation you must finish the programming mode Default Setting This system has default factory settings Required Telephone Set One of the following Proprietary Telephone PT sets with display is required for User Programming e Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7431 KX T7235 KX T7230 e Analog Proprietary Telephone APT KX T7130 KX T7030 KX T7330 KX T7335 Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display PT Three soft buttons are provided just below the display of the following Digital Proprietary Telephones DPTs KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 KX T7436 Functions of these Soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance step by step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display If the SHIFT button indicator is on two functions are available for each Soft button To alternate between the two functions press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display User Manual User Programming Using the Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times in the programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change in the programming mode as follows The original
151. Extension Group FDN Group Type e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key e 5 10 VPS Integration Voice Mail Command Leave Message User Manual 395 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Voice Mail Command Get Message Voice Mail Command AA Message Voice Mail Command VM Message Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration VPS User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 83 VPS Integration 396 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 83 VPS Integration Allows you to have your calls forwarded to your Voice Processing System mailbox Setting Call Forwarding destination to Voice Mail na lace Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR FWD DND 7 4 For PT Press For PT For SLT PT Dial the FWD number FWD DND FWD AIl Calls Dial 2 You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD DND button instead Voice Mail extension no Dial Voice Mail extension number Confirmation 3 or 4 digits tone and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt FWD A11 ExXtxxxx User Manual L___VM extension number For SLT PT Dial 710 FWD Busy Dial 3 FWD No Answer Dial 4 FWD Busy No Answer Dial 5 o 6a Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR e Calls directed to your extension are
152. Extension Users The KX TD500 System also supports the connection of Terminal Equipment with separate power supplies For example ISDN Telephones G4 Facsimiles or Personal Computers which are connected to an ISDN SO bus on a BRI Basic Rate Interface card KX TD50288 A maximum of eight Terminal Equipment can be connected to each ISDN SO bus with Point to Multipoint configuration However only up to two Terminal Equipment can be used simultaneously Each Terminal Equipment connected to the SO bus can be addressed individually with Multiple Directory Numbers MDNs The MDN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit 0 through 9 If MDN is not assigned all equipment on the same SO bus are called simultaneously User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT The functions of Terminal Equipment are similar to Single Line Telephone functions except for the following features e Absent Message e Extension Group Incoming Group Service e Alternate Calling Ring Voice Hunting Operator Ring UCD e Automatic Callback Busy e External Feature Access EFA e Call Forwarding e Extra Device Port e Call Hold e Log In Log Out e Call Hold Retrieve e Manager Extension e Call Log Incoming Log Lock e Message Waiting e Call Park e Paging Group Answer e Call Pickup e Phantom Extension e Call Transfer e Paralleled Telephone e Call Waiting e Pickup Dialing e Caller ID e Released Link Operation e Confere
153. FCC Rules including the number of Ringers which may be connected to a particular telephone line which is needed to permit Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner compatible with Telephone Company communications facilities shall be provided by the Telephone Company upon customer s request b Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities Equipment Operations and Procedures The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the User Manual Telephone Company and F C C Requirements and Responsibilities operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone Company Communications Facilities or require modification or alteration of such Terminal Equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Notify the Telephone Company Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer Before connecting this equipment to any telephone call the telephone company and inform them of the following e Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected e Make Panasonic e Model KX TD500 and KX TD520 e FCC Registra
154. Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Dial Type Selection 1 12 Conversation Features e End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through e Pulse to Tone Conversion User Manual 259 Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 260 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override You can interrupt an existing call This establishes a 3 party conference call This feature can be categorized as follows Executive Busy Override Barge In PT only Allows the PT user to interrupt an existing outside call either between two outside parties or between an outside party and an inside party by pressing the red lit S CO or DN button Executive Busy Override Extension Allows the extension PT SLT user to interrupt an existing intercom call either between two inside parties or between an inside party and an outside party by dialing 2 after hearing a busy tone To join an existing outside call Barge in hy D C CO DN di E A three party conference Y A rA is now established Lift the handset or press Press the red lit CO or DN Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR corresponding to the optional desired caller To join
155. IFT button as follows SAT JANO1 12 00A Extension STA speed a z Co Features SYS speed Initial Display Call Log CONT Third Display Conditions e The sixth and seventh displays of the KX T7431 are used for the ringer volume and display contrast adjustments For details please refer to Section 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series e Second Display of the KX T7433 and KX T7436 is displayed only when you utilize the Caller ID User Manual 489 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory There are three Call Directory features as follows Feature Description Condition Extension Dialing You can make an intercom call Only items which have a name using the directory assigned are displayed in System Speed Dialing You can make a call to a party alpuabetoal pragi stored in the system using the directory Station Speed Dialing You can make a call to a party Items which have a name assigned stored in your phone are displayed by priority in stored order If a name is not assigned the number is displayed The displaying mode name or number can be assigned by System Programming To use the Call Directory you may shift the display to the Jog Dial Operation display by pressing the SH
156. IFT button first Then follow the procedures on the following pages Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment DN e 2 8 System Option Station Speed Dialing Initial display e 4 3 Extension Line Name e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Name Number Features Guide References 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory User Manual References e 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only 490 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set e 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set KX T7431 System Speed Daing statin Speed Dialing Extension Dialing Second Display Third Display Fourth Display BO IA Co System Speed Dialing Station Speed Notes Dialing Extension Dialing e You can lift the handset or press the SP PHONE 1 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is button instead of the SELECT button displayed e Press the MODE button to return to the initial 2 Press the SELECT button or go off hook display e For System Speed Dialing and Extension Dialing before rotating the Jog Dial you can press the corresponding alphabet key to select the desired letter lt Example gt Press 2 twice to display B items User Manual 491 Station Features and Operation P
157. Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only Caller ID or Call Duration You can specify the initial display Caller ID or Call Duration which is shown on the display PT when you answer a CO call by System Programming Call Information Display feature is also available for KX T7431 and display APTs However the operation of KX T7431 and display APTs is different from that of KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 The KX T7431 and display APTs user can switch the display by pressing while receiving the Caller ID information Programming Guide References 2 5 System Timer Call Duration Count Start Time 2 8 System Option LCD Display Mode while CO Talking 4 2 Trunk Line Name 4 3 Extension Line DN Name Initial Display Selection 5 12 Caller ID Registration Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service 1 17 Display Features e Display Call Information User Manual References 462 2 2 6 Initial Display Selection 3 2 6 006 Caller ID Dial Set 3 2 7 007 Caller ID Name Set 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 4 5 5 Call Log Incoming Log Lock KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only User Manual 463 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only If you do not an
158. LEPHONE NO WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF MOISTURE Note If you connect the Panasonic Wireless System model KX TD336900 to the Digital Super Hybrid System the following features do not work with the Wireless System a Call Forwarding Follow Me b Limited Call Duration Please refer to Programming Guide User Manual Cautions Accessory Order Information e Replacement parts and accessories are available through your local authorized parts distributor e For ordering accessories call toll free 1 800 332 5368 Part No Picture Description Comment KX J25W B KX JO7W B KX JI5W B ge Handset cord 213 36 cm 7 feet 457 2 cm 15 feet 762 cm 25 feet W White B Black User Manual Introduction Introduction Who Should Use This Manual This manual is designed for users of Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD500 It is to be used after the system is installed and System Programming is completed The focus is Digital Proprietary Telephones DPTs KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 Digital DSS Consoles KX T7240 KX T7440 KX T7441 Single Line Telephones SLTs and their features The step by step procedures required to activate each feature are discussed in detail Illustrations of the KX TD500 system and the required System Programming a
159. LT hy pD K 5 lof o x LEN Ebda Lift the handset or press Dial 590 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt CLIR OFF User Manual 221 Station Features and Operation PT SLT To change the setting at any time for a particular call PT and SLT A 3 sls D Lift the handset or press Dial 591 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone co CL__ For PT hy D 9 For SLT PT ss 2 cba Dial tone Dial the phone Talk Hang up or press trunk group no For SLT PT n mber SP PHONE MONITOR For PT Press CO For SLT PT Dial 9 j For SLT PT Dial 8 and the trunk The display shows the phone number group number 01 through 48 The selected CO indicator light turns green Conditions e If the presentation is enabled the other party can check the caller s number name before answering the call Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan CLIR CNIR Features Guide References 2 2 ISDN Originating Features e Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP e Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR e Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP e Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR User Manual References e 4 3 19 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 222 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 21 Conference 3 Par
160. Lift the handset or press Dial 79 To set Primary Dial 2 Dial the desired extension number SP PHONE MONITOR To set Secondary Dial 3 3 or 4 digits or press DSS bo 3 g Confirmation tone Hang up or press following and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button y J Gba The display shows either one of the lt PT Display Example gt XXXX Primary or XXXX Secondary Conditions e The Manager and the Operators can also change their own COS level User Manual 437 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan COS Primary COS Secondary e 2 4 Class of Service COS e 4 3 Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Class of Service COS 1 6 Originating Features e Walking COS User Manual References None 438 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 11 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call The Manager and the Operators can remotely set or cancel the Timed Reminder to the desired extension Setting 7235 7436 FON NEXT c Remote Timed Reminder Lift the handset C Features 7 or press SP PHONE Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press Press Remote Timed Reminder NEXT until the following is displayed lt PT Display Example gt
161. Light Emitting Diode Y indicates the button is available Usage AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button Used for Hands free answer back and it turns the microphone off during a conversation AUTO DIAL STORE Button Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes CONF Conference Button Used to establish a 3 party 5 party conference call FLASH Button Sends an External Feature Access signal to the central office or host PBX to access their system features If a PBX is not being used this button can be used to disconnect the current call and start another call without hanging up Function F1 through F10 Buttons Used to perform the corresponding displayed function or operation FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Button Used to program the Call Forwarding feature or set the Do Not Disturb DND feature HOLD Button Used to place a call on hold INTERCOM Button Used to make or receive extension calls Jog Dial Used to adjust the volume of the handset receiver headset ringer and speaker It also adjusts the display contrast Please refer to Section 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series For KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 users it is also used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu MESSAGE Button Used to leave a notification to a busy extension or call back the message notification sender MODE Button Used to shift the display in order to access various features MONITOR Button Used for a hands
162. Mode a is B Press Function F1 F10 Press NEXT S3 The STORE indicator light turns off The display shows the current status The display shows the current status If nothing is stored Not Stored is displayed lt PT Display Example gt Bob Graham Name is now CLR NEXT programmed AUTO DIAL desired name oO STORE Enter the name Press STORE The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Please refer to Combination Table 1 and Combination Table 2 in Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only for information on how to enter each character Conditions e Upto 10 characters can be stored 100 User Manual Station Programming For KX T7431 and KX T7433 users To store a number Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 7431 7433 station speed dial no desired number Dial X X Enter a station speed dial Enter the desired number Press STORE number 0 through 9 extension number phone number etc AUTO DIAL STORE The STORE indicator lights The STORE indicator light turns off The display shows the initial The display shows the current status programming mode If nothing is stored Not Stored is displayed lt PT Display Ex
163. NE MONITOR again Dial tone e The call is transferred e The SDN indicator light turns green 348 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions PT DN SDN button An SDN button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a DN type PT by Station User or System Programming PT DN FWD DND Override The call originated by this feature overrides FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature assigned on the PDN owner extension PT DN A call made by this feature rings the destination PDN button immediately even if delayed ringing or no ring is set on that PDN button Please refer to Section 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e PDN Call 1 11 Transferring Features e Ringing Transfer 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 68 Ringing Transfer User Manual 349 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 61 Phantom Extension Allows you to route calls to a phantom extension The call arrives at the extension who has the corresponding Phantom button A flexible CO button can be assigned as the Phantom button The lighting patterns of Phantom button
164. Note e You can also set Voice Mail as the forwarding destination Please refer to Section 4 3 83 VPS Integration User Manual 177 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting 7436 7235 FWD DND Cancel la Do Not Disturb pdr FWD DND FWD All Calls dF SS D a FWD Busy extension no extension no D mh FWD No Answer 4 Lift the handset or Press Enter extension Confirmation tone press SP PHONE FWD DND number and dial tone FWD BSY NA ext FWD CO TIE Line dial FWD From ext FWD From Cancel ext For FWD From Follow Me FWD NA CO TIE dial dial your extension number MENU PREV NEXT Sa Hang up or press SP PHONE a 24 digits C Fi C0 TIE Line dial line access E m PAD NA CO TIE dial Press desired button Enter line access Enter phone number 9 or 77 or number 801 848 v Ghd Hang up or press Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone D a k Dial 178 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting PT and SLT FWD DND For PT N 9 CIEC ForSLI PT Lift the handset For PT Press FWD DND or press For SLT PT Dial 710 SP PHONE MONITOR e You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD DND button instead User Manual For Follow Me dial your extension number I extension no Enter extension number 2 all calls C Busy La No Answer L5 Busy No
165. OM or DN indicator light turns steady green Conditions PT There are three types of Line Preference for incoming calls No Line Prime Line Ringing Line Each preference can be selected by Station or System Programming e PE Helpful hints for the Hands free speakerphone operation are noted in the Hands free Operation feature oP ET If you want to answer an intercom call without going off hook press the AUTO ANSWER button Hands free Answerback To cancel the Hands free Answerback press the AUTO ANSWER button again Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Preferred Line Incoming Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Answering Direct Trunk 1 16 Button Features Button Line Access 154 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References e 2 2 11 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 5 Answering Direct Trunk e 4 3 40 Hands free Answerback e 4 3 41 Hands free Operation User Manual 155 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 Station Features and Operation 4 3 1 Absent Message Capability You can select one of nine pre programmed Absent Messages 1 9 for your extension The display PT users calling your extension see the message you select Absent messages are used to inform the party calling y
166. ONE Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button To lift or set down the display To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button 2 Lift up the display To set down the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button LCD ADJ button 2 Press down the display 28 User Manual DPT Overview KX T7250 Memory Card Pull out the card and write down the names or phone numbers associated Flexible CO Buttons with automatic dialing numbers Outside lines 01 through 06 RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume INTERCOM Button OO REDIAL Button PROGRAM Button FLASH Button VOLUME Control Button HOLD Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button MONITOR Button TRANSFER Button User Manual 29 DPT Overview 1 1 3 Connection Connect as shown KX T7400 Series DPTs Connect to the KX TD500 System a ache Connect to a Single Line Telephone SLT oe d jack Telephone Answering Machine or FAX for XDP or parallel connections lt Back View gt XDP eXtra Device Port expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two telephones For more details please consult your dealer KX T7200 Series DPTs The included telephone line cord gt Connect to a Single Line Telephone SLT jack Telephone Answering Machine or FAX for XDP or parallel connections gt Connect to the KX TD500 System XDP eXtra Device Port expands the num
167. PDN button should always be assigned to the CO 01 button regardless of the number of the PDN buttons assigned User Manual Station Programming Release Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as a Release button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL e is Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 95 Press STORE DSS PF button you wish to assign as the Release button STORE lt PT Display Example gt Release e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM SAVE Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as a SAVE button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL oc Ls Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 5 Press STORE DSS PF button you wish to assign as the SAVE button STORE lt PT Display Example gt Save e The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 75 Station Programming Secondary Directory Number SDN Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as an SDN button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 a AUTO DIAL extensio
168. Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute Paging feature using the display operation All External e An external pager user supplied must be connected to the System beforehand Up to two external pagers can be connected to the KX TD500 System e External Paging Tone External paging tone is emitted from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 2 Tenant External Paging Tone in the Programming Guide gt e External Paging Priority External pagers can be used for TAFAS Paging External or Background Music BGM External in this order For example if Paging External is overridden by TAFAS a reorder tone is returned to the performer of Paging External If Background Music BGM External is overridden by another higher priority it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished e If you hear a busy tone after dialing an external pager access number the external pager s you specified is are busy User Manual 335 Station Features and Operation PT SLT All Group e A maximum of 16 station paging groups each consisting of one or more extension groups can be created in the System lt Section 3 4 Paging Group in the Programming Guide gt e A single Extension Group cannot bel
169. Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System User Manual Model No KX 1TD500 Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System and save this manual for future reference Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX TD500 Digital Super Hybrid System User Manual System Components System Components Model No Description Service Unit KX TD500 Digital Super Hybrid System KX T7220 Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7230 Digital Proprietary Telephone with Display KX T7235 Digital Proprietary Telephone with Large Display KX T7250 Digital Proprietary Telephone Telephone KX T7420 Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7425 Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7431 Digital Proprietary Telephone with Display KX T7433 Digital Proprietary Telephone with Display KX T7436 Digital Proprietary Telephone with Large Display KX T7240 DSS Console Optional KX T7440 DSS Console Equipment KX T7441 DSS Console with Answer and Release buttons User supplied i Single Line Telephones Equipment User Manual Cautions Cautions When using the KX T7200 and KX T7400 series keep the following conditions in mind If there is any trouble unplug the extension line and connect a known working phone If the known working phone operates properly have the defective phone repaired by a specified Panasonic Factory Service Center If the known working phone does
170. Plan Local CO Line Access ARS Trunk Group Access 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting 2 6 Local Hunt Sequence 331 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 3 2 Trunk Group Line Hunting Order e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Preferred Line Outgoing Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Account Code Entry e Remote Station Lock Control e Trunk Group 1 6 Originating Features e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On e Automatic Route Selection ARS e Electronic Station Lockout e Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line e Toll Restriction e Trunk Access e Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 12 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 332 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 55 Paging Allows you to make a voice announcement to a lot of people in the office simultaneously Your message is announced through built in speakers of Proprietary Telephones PTs or external speakers External Pagers or both The paged person can answer your paging announcement from any telephone in the office Paging Answer Making and answering a paging announcement is possible either from a PT or SLT You can also make a paging announcement while putting a call on consultation hold in order to transfer it Pagin
171. Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL DSS n 3 E_ STORE Press the desired Press STORE DSS button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming Message Waiting de To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 517 DSS Console Features 5 2 13 One Touch Dialing Button Assignment You can assign a DSS or PF button as a One Touch Dialing button The number can be an extension number or a telephone number Up to 24 digits can be stored into each memory location Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS PF N AUTO DIAL Dor deren nD E STORE Press the desired Enter the desired number Press STORE DSS or PF button extension number phone number etc lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode CLR e Up to 24 digits can be stored e When you assign an outside phone number you must enter a line access code first To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode
172. RAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS AUTO DIAL a 9 o Voice Mail extension Oo number STORE Press the desired Dial 90 Press STORE DSS button Enter the Voice Mail extension number 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights 2 WAY REC The display shows the initial CLR programming mode lt PT Display Example gt 2 WAY REC xXxxx CLR e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode xxxx VM extension number To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 524 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 20 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Two Way Transfer button This allows you to record a conversation into your own mailbox Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Lelli Dial 91 DSS UA Press the desired DSS button lt PT Display Example gt
173. Remote FWD Cancel Once Station Program Clear Switching COS Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Trunk Busy out Setting Trunk Route Control UCD Monitor Mode Walking COS User Manual 487 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Jog Dial Operation You can search for desired items on the corresponding display menu by using the Jog Dial Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired The items will be displayed as follows Left Right counterclockwise AA N clockwise To the previous To the next item item Jog Dial Operation Display KX T7431 While idle the display changes as follows by pressing the MODE button The Jog Dial operation is available in the second through seventh displays initial Display MODE Second Display Seventh Display 488 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT KX T7433 The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display While idle the bottom line of the display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows Initial Display CONT RING BGM lt SHIT KX T7436 The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display While idle the bottom line of the display changes by pressing the SH
174. S button you wish to assign as the Message Waiting button lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode AUTO DIAL Message Waiting To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 71 Station Programming One Touch Dialing Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as a One Touch Dialing button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL U 2 desired number oO STORE Press the desired Flexible Enter the desired number Press STORE CO DSS PF button you extension number wish to assign as a phone number etc One Touch Dialing button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode CLR e Up to 24 digits can be stored e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The number can be an extension number telephone number or a feature number Up to 24 digits can be stored in a One Touch Dialing button e To store the telephone number of an outside party a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit e You can store a numb
175. S button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming nC mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM t Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 User Manual 515 DSS Console Features 5 2 11 Live Call Screening LCS Cancel Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Live Call Screening LCS Cancel button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL Press the desired Dial 93 Press STORE DSS button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights LCS Cancel a T shows the initial programming To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 516 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 12 Message Waiting MESSAGE Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Message Waiting MESSAGE button Be sure that you are in the Station
176. S password your extension no Walking Station start 727 1 Walking Station end 727 0 source extension no 548 User Manual Appendix 1 hhmm hh hour 01 12 mm minute 00 59 Fixed Feature Numbers Caller ID Name Feature Type 1 Type 2 Default While a busy tone is heard Automatic Callback Busy 6 6 Busy Station Signaling BSS Off Hook Call 1 2 Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override 2 3 While a Do Not Disturb tone is heard Do Not Disturb Override 1 2 While calling or talking Account Code Delimiter 99 99 Alternate Calling Ring Voice x x Conference 3 3 Door Open 5 5 Pulse to Tone Conversion x x When the extension is on hook Background Music BGM on off 1 HOLD TRANSFER Day Night mode display Time display Self Extension Number display x switching When a CO call is arriving Receiving the Caller ID information Switching CO Line Name Caller ID Number x x Conditions e Extension numbers can be three or four digits in length Any number can be set as the leading first or second digit e Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed while a dial tone is heard e If xX or is included in a feature number it will not be possible for users with dial pulse DP telephones to access the feature e Feature Number Conflicts Examples 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc e Additional Digits Some
177. SHIFT button and a Soft button See Combination Table 1 1 Press 6 and then press the S1 button to enter M 2 Press 4 and then press the SHIFT and S3 button to enter i 3 Press 5 and then press the S2 button to enter k 4 Press 3 and then press the S2 button to enter e User Manual Station Programming Using the Jog Dial With a KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only See Combination Table 2 1 Press 6 and then rotate the Jog Dial one pulse to enter M 2 Press 4 and then rotate the Jog Dial six pulses to enter i 3 Press 5 and then rotate the Jog Dial four pulses to enter k 4 Press 3 and then rotate the Jog Dial four pulses to enter e OR 1 Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until M appears 2 Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until i appears 3 Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until k appears 4 Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until e appears Notes e Pressing the SHIFT button alternates between capital and lower case letters Once this button is pressed that letter SHIFT mode remains until SHIFT is pressed again e To erase the last character to backspace press the CONF button The CONF button becomes the lt backspace key when using the overlay e To erase the line press CLR S2 button or TRANSFER button e If you keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters will be displayed in order lt Example gt If you rotate the Jog Dial after pressing 2 al
178. ST 1234 Called by transfer recall without name Call Transfer Restricted RESTREINT An outgoing call is restricted 542 User Manual Appendix English Display French Display Description Ringer SONN Volume Control ringer on idle status SP gt kk kk kkk kkk HP k k de de de e de e e e e Volume Control speaker on hands free mode Transfer to CO TRANSFERT A LR The destination extension is set Call Forwarding to Outside Line Try Again RESSAYER When the destination extension is in one of the following states Off hook incoming call Call Hold All buttons on PT are in use Unlocked DEVERROUILLE Cancel Call Log Lock Incoming Cancel Electronic Station Lockout Will Return Soon Will Return Soon Absent Message 1 Provides you with a caller s information such as his name and telephone number on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls This requires a subscription for caller identification services For more details please consult with your dealer User Manual 543 Appendix Examples in Station Programming mode English Display French Display Description Account COMPTE Account button is assigned C W Tonel TON APPEL1 Select Call Waiting tone Clear Ready ANNULER DONNEES Available to clear Station Programming data CO 10101 LR 10
179. System Speed Dialing 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory User Manual References e 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only e 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set e 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set 476 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu You can access various features using the messages which are displayed in alphabetical order To access the features press the Feature F4 button on the initial display first search for the desired feature message by pressing the NEXT S3 button Then press the Function button which is next to the message Additional parameters may be required To access the features while receiving a call e g ringing press the INTERCOM DN button first Then follow the procedures on the following pages Features on the First Display Co Features SYS Speed co Call Log CONT RING BGM Absent Message First Display Capability Absent MSG Off Shows your message on Absent MSG On 71 9 the calling party s display BSY Out Cancel PHY BSY Out Confirm PHY BSY Out Set PHY MENU PREV NEXT See the next page Dial message number 1 through 9 y On hook ooo eats Trunk Busy out _ m z dim Sewer operator manager on GL p g y Ref
180. T SLT 4 3 64 Pulse to Tone Conversion You can change the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone temporarily to access services such as computer telephone services Voice Mail etc that require a tone PT and SLT phone no Pulse mode desired no Tone mode Dial the phone number Dial X Dial the desired number Pulse mode Tone mode Conditions e This feature works only for CO lines set to Pulse Dialing mode e You cannot change the dialing mode from Tone to Pulse Programming Guide References e 4 2 Trunk Line Dial Type Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Dial Type Selection 1 12 Conversation Features e Pulse to Tone Conversion User Manual References None User Manual 359 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 65 Quick Dialing Allows you to make a quick dial call by dialing a pre assigned quick dial number For example Quick Dialing is convenient for room service calls in a hotel Dialing PT and SLT rN Lift the handset or press Dial the quick dial number SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions e Up to eight quick dial numbers can be stored by System or User Programming e To utilize this feature please assign a feature number for Quick dial 1 8 first by System Programming lt Section 2 3 Numbering Plan 63 70 Quick dial 1 8 in the Programming Guide Then please assign a quick dial number by User Programming lt Section 3 2 9 009 Quick Dial Number Set in
181. T SLT KX T7433 Third Display STA EXT FEAT dtr tr Station Speed Dialing Extension Dialing 3 gt Adam gt Bob Jones S Alice Carol MENU CALL MENU CALL or Lak i sytem Speed Dialing ZON gt Bob Jones A Carol MENU CALL or ts Ej System Speed Dialing Note 1 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at For System Speed Dialing and Extension the arrow Dialing before rotating the Jog Dial you can press the corresponding alphabet key to select the desired letter lt Example gt Press 2 twice to display B items 2 Press the CALL S3 button or go off hook Station Speed Dialing Extension Dialing 1 Press the STA S1 or EXT S2 button 2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow 3 Press the CALL S3 button or go off hook 492 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT KX T7436 Using the Function button Initial Display WED JANO1 03 00P Extension STA Speed Station Speed Dialing Features SYS Speed Call Log CONT RING BGM Extension Dialing System Speed Dialing Yoshida Zaydel Adam Alice UOd00 Ann Par
182. Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 WY indicates that the feature is available Line Access Buttons The following three types of CO buttons can be used to seize a CO line when making a CO call Single CO S CO button e Group CO G CO button e Loop CO L CO button Conditions e A flexible CO button can be assigned as a Line Access Button S CO G CO or L CO by Station User or System Programming Once a flexible CO button is assigned as a Line Access Button it provides the line status by lighting patterns and green red indication Please refer to Section 1 1 7 LED Indication e You can set S CO G CO and L CO buttons on one Proprietary Telephone Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the following priority S CO gt G CO gt L CO User Manual 35 DPT Overview Single CO S CO button An S CO button is a CO line access button This allows you to access a specific CO line by pressing an S CO button An incoming CO call can be directed to an S CO button Conditions e The same CO line cannot be assigned to more than one S CO button on a PT e Itis possible to assign the same CO line to an S CO button a G CO button and an L CO button respectively Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 1 1 4 Feature Buttons e 2 2 3 Flexible
183. The EXIT S1 button is used to see other caller s information Or press the INFO S1 button repeatedly to see the terumi One gerend display information in detail Or modify the number if required 4 To call back go off hook and then press the CALL S1 button When a new call is logged the display changes to the second display automatically User Manual 467 Station Features and Operation PT SLT KX T7436 KX T7235 Second Display WED JANO1 03 00P To return to SHEL Extension STA Speed the initial SHIFT Features SYS Speed Call Log display Once KX T7235 OLD7 NEWS Twice KX T7436 To see the confirmed To see the unconfirmed information information 10101 AB COMPANY outside line number name 0102030405 caller s telephone number Bob Jones caller s name OCT30 09 03PM date and time SEQO1 02CALL sequence number 01 30 MENU CLR number of times called Domni S J To modify the phone numos To see the press to aese other caller s and 0 through 9 information to add numbers from the first digit To call back go off hook 10101 AB COMPANY 0102030405 Bob Jones OCT30 09 03PM SEQ01 02CALL CALL 0O000 DOCENT 468 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Operating sequence Notes 1 Press the SHIFT button e To delete the display
184. User or System Programming Definition of busy extension status PT ICM Off hook ICM button is not idle PT DN There is no idle DN buttons on a PT Off hook While engaged in a call SLT Off hook an SLT is ringing an SLT has a call placed on hold display PT Extension Names can be given to all extensions by User or System Programming An extension number and a name if programmed are shown on the display PT during an intercom call Call Directory Extension Dialing With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can make an extension call using the Call Directory Extension Dialing display operation Programming Guide References 280 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Attribute Tel Type DN Group No 2 2 Tenant Inter tenant Calling 1 8 2 3 Numbering Plan 1st Hundred Block Extension 2nd Hundred Block Extension 3rd Hundred Block Extension 4th Hundred Block Extension User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 5th Hundred Block Extension 6th Hundred Block Extension 7th Hundred Block Extension 8th Hundred Block Extension 9th Hundred Block Extension 10th Hundred Block Extension 11th Hundred Block Extension 16th Hundred Block Extension e 4 3 Extension Line Name CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide Ref
185. a eand ia Ennn 271 User Manual Table of Contents 4 3 39 Handset Microphone Mute cece nreno inder astaat 273 4 3 40 Hands free Answerback 0 0 eeescescceseeseeceseesseecseceseceseeeneesaeeeaeecsaeceeeseeseeseaeeseaes 275 43 41 Hands free Operation sccaras aeaee deans intend Leeann tines 277 4 342 Inter Office Calling ee neia ara eaae A E a EEE EE E EEEE aE E 279 43 43 Live Call Screening LES onrein a aaien apap eaii teea reai 282 434 TEOCKOUt 2 cssete n n r a ese A N TE A 292 4 343 Los In Loe Outy areen eE ean an a or Senate tei aes 293 43 46 Message Walting ocsac ct tetera teed eae ie Wa eet ana es 297 43 47 Microphone Mutey c s5 Aaesviseteesieetieves tans don Hosta pay mateiaceiin ies hastens 302 4 3 48 Night Service On OPt si 2 ss ccsei sce iavee seta ieee ER EN eed ea 304 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA cccccccccccesseeceseseceneseceenaaeeecnsaeeeensaes 311 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whispet ccecececescceeseeeeneceeeeeeeeees 316 43 51 Off HOOK MOMIUOE jetsiic fecelieasecheusesactieek atdanebetccesth ba labetiabacePesbunetentesptiscenstexuesebeessonss 321 43 52 One Touch Dialitig Ache eA eA AN AU ANAS 323 4 353 Operator Calli tak cranked wees cece iS es ies A ch a ea 325 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk ACCESS 00 lec etceseeeeeceseeeceeeseesseceaeecaeceseceseseaeeseeesaaeeaaees 327 43 59 Pasine suai e ils Re heel nie ana eG eh ee ee ee 333 4 3 36 Pa
186. al 243 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND Allows you to prevent other parties from disturbing you Your extension will not receive intercom and outside calls Setting 7235 7436 Do Not Disturb FWD DND Lift the handset or Press FWD DND Press Do Not Disturb F2 Confirmation tone Hang up or press press SP PHONE and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt Do Not Disturb The FWD DND indicator light turns red Canceling 7235 7436 FWD DND Cancel FWD DND Lift the handset or Press FWD DND Press FWD DND Cancel F1 Confirmation tone Hang up or press press SP PHONE and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt FWD DND Cancel The FWD DND indicator light turns red 244 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling PT and SLT gt Lift the handset or press FWD DND For PT To set fo 1 iz 1 0 Forsuner 0 ro cance wy For PT Press FWD DND To set Dial 1 Confirmation tone For SLT PT Dial 710 To cancel Dial 0 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR g ows Hang up or press Conditions When setting the FWD DND indicator light turns red lt PT Display Example gt Do Not Disturb e When canceling the FWD DND indicator light turns off SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt FWD DND Cancel DND also works for a
187. al References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 52 One Touch Dialing e 4 3 72 Station Speed Dialing e 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing User Manual 371 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 71 Station Program Clear Allows you to reset the following station features to the default settings a Absent Message Capability The message set on your extension b Automatic Callback Busy c Background Music that has been turned on d Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb DND e Call Log Incoming Call Pickup Deny g Call Waiting BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA h Data Line Security G Executive Busy Override Deny G Log out k Message Waiting All messages that have been left on your extension by other extension users Paging Deny m Paralleled Telephone enabled n Pickup Dialing The stored telephone number One Touch dial on PF12 will be removed 0 Timed Reminder p Walking Station Clearing the current feature settings PT and SLT gt Lift the handset or press Dial 790 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR 372 lt PT Display Example gt Ext Data Clear g Gba Hang up or press User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature usin
188. alarm stops If you are having a conversation at the time the alarm is set to sound the alarm starts after the conversation Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information data time tenant no extension number start answer no answer It is programmable by System Programming to print out when the Timed Reminder starts and the alarm is answered or not answered The print out example is shown below Date 22 02 00 22 02 00 22 02 00 Pig 2g 2s 2k 2g 28 2g 2g 2s 2k E E E E E E EE E E E E E E oie E E E E E E E ois E E E E E E E E E 2k E E E oie ois E E E E E E E E E E E E E oie E E 2k E E E E E E K K oie K 2c K os k k k k K k k k k k k ok ok ok ok Time T Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Acct code CC EEEE EE EEE E E E E E E EEE E E E E E 2s E E E E E E E E os E E 2s E E E E E E E E E E E 2s E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 2k E E E E E K 2s K E K E K K k k k k K k k kK k k k kkk k 01 3I1PM__1 EIOI7 Timed Reminder Start 01 3I1PM__1 E1017 Timed Reminder No Answer 01 31PM 1 EIOI7 Timed Reminder Answer User Manual Setting a new time clears the preset time Timed Reminder Ringing Time The alarm tone continues to ring the destination extension for 30 seconds by default This period of time ranging from 30 to 240 seconds can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Ringing Time in the Programming Guide gt Timed Reminder
189. all Pickup Allows you to answer a call intercom outside doorphone ringing at any other extension The following types are available Feature Type Picking up call type Directed A specific extension s call Group A call within your extension group CO Line An outside call Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible Call Pickup Deny Call Pickup CO Line PT and SLT h C pI ON cage Lift the handset or press Dial 4X Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR optional Call Pickup Directed PT and SLT ror Lalla Lift the handset or press Dial 41 Dial the extension Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR number where the optional call is ringing User Manual 197 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Call Pickup Group PT and SLT gt KEKE Lift the handset or press Dial 40 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR optional Conditions General Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who picked up the call Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt e This feature is not available to answer the following calls a call ringing at an extension in Call Pickup Deny mode a call which shows the call arrival indication bu
190. ame display 1234 1234 Make or receive an intercom call name is not assigned 1234 Tony Viola 1234 Tony Viola Make or receive an intercom call name is assigned Confirm key programming on the DSS or MESSAGE button 2345 Busy 2345 OCCUPE Destination extension is busy 4567 DND 4567 NPD Destination extension is set to Do Not Disturb DND 5678 Free 5678 LIBRE Called by Camp On intercom recall 3456 MDM Access 3456 ACCES MDM Destination is modem for remote access 1234567890 1234567890 Called by a CO line with the Caller ID number Panasonic Panasonic Called by a CO line with the Caller ID name 950 1001PP12345 amp 950 1001PP12345 amp Confirm key programming on the REDIAL SAVE or One Touch Dialing button 1234 Tony Viola 1234 Tony Viola Make or receive an intercom call after the call is transferred name is assigned 1234 10101 Tony 1234 10101 Tony Called by a CO line after a call is transferred 2345 Busy 2345 OCCUPE Destination extension is busy after the call is transferred 4567 DND 4567 NPD Destination extension is set to Do Not Disturb DND after the call is transferred 538 User Manual Appendix English Display French Display Description Account COMPTE Confirm key programming on the Account button Alarm 10 15AM AVERT 10 15AM Complete t
191. amming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 program access number Enter the program access number Press HOLD END e The display shows the initial programming mode e Enter the program access number as follows 1 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 2 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 3 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment 4 Intercom Alert Assignment 5 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment 6 Self Extension Number Confirmation 7 Live Call Screening Mode Sett 81 Initial Display Selection 82 Bilingual Display Selection 9 Handset Headset Selection 01 Remote Station Look Control Operator Manager only 02 Call Log Lock Control Incoming Operator Manager only 03 Live Call Screening Password Control Operator Manager only Station Programming Data Default Set The display shows the programmed data lt PT Display Example gt When you press 5 the display shows C W Tonel The Call Waiting tone is currently programmed to Tone 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM If you wish to change the data follow the programming procedure explained in this section A programming access number is required to program confirm the function data by Statio
192. ample gt 9 123 4567 Outside number 123 4567 CLR NEXT is now programmed Up to 24 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X FLASH PAUSE INTERCOM P or secret and CONF hyphen can be stored To store the telephone number of an outside party the line access code 9 or 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit To erase the line press the CLR S2 button or TRANSFER button CLR S2 button for KX T7433 users TRANSFER button for KX T7431 users To store a name press the NEXT S3 button KX T7433 or MODE button KX T7431 and go to step 4 in To store a name as described in the following procedure To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 101 Station Programming To store a name Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 7431 7433 station speed dial no Enter a station speed dial number 0 through 9 The STORE indicator light turns off The display shows the current status If nothing is stored Not Stored is displayed lt PT Display Example gt Name is now programmed Bob Graham CLR NEXT desired name Enter the name MODE next E Press NEXT S3 or MODE NEXT S3 button for KX T7433 users MODE button for KX T7431 users AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE The STORE indicator lights The display
193. and F C C Requirements and Responsibilities to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this device 12 User Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 DPT Overview 1 1 COMMPUL ATION e cssccceeseccesestceesectcesseactetenacsccseecscedasedescaseocecssececdssesscuesoccucuscscsesccsesescsseccees 20 LIJ Configuration 2 isaiiccii cise Maisie visio ais eight E ea 20 112 Location OF Contos snein e des veda a a ebb eas tach Lalecestaleeetaanch sh udaitces 21 EL Connecti sarao eae aici Baw adele eh ive ie as aoe ie 30 Lc Feature Buttons sie cd ate eleva ae aa eae aa ee ee 31 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series 0 eeeecneecnseesecesaeceeeseneseaecaecaeceaeenseees 39 1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series 00 ceeeeeeneecnseeeecesaeceeeseneeeaecnaecaeceaeeeaeeees 43 LASTS TEED Wii aC atn Omics re a a ies Bada daa at E taba dats bod tata eat eect ete ee 46 2 Station Programming 2 1 Station Programming Instructions csscssssccsssccsssccssssssssssssssccssssssssssssesssssceseess 50 2 1 1 Station Programming Instructions ee ceeesseeeseeeneecsceeeeceseceseeeeeeeeaecaaecaeceaeenseeses 50 2 2 Station Programming oie ccesescscscesesssvesss scenes scacseescacssessacsaesesssesusscssenssc
194. and SLT If you hear Do Not Disturb DND tone after making an intercom call h H co ee DND tone Wait for an answer and talk lt PT Display Example gt 101 DND Conditions e Class of Service Class of Service COS programming determines the extension that can perform this feature e Ifyou hear a reorder tone after dialing 1 your extension is not permitted to execute Do Not Disturb DND Override feature by System Programming e What if a busy tone is heard after DND override The other extension in DND mode is busy In this case you may perform the following features Automatic Callback Camp on Busy Station Signaling BSS Exclusive Busy Override Extension 248 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS DND Override Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Do Not Disturb DND Override 1 8 Ringing Features e Do Not Disturb DND User Manual References e 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND User Manual 249 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 29 Doorphone Call Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone You can also unlock the door from your telephone Calling an extension from a doorphone operation for a visitor Doorphone Press the Doorphone button for one
195. and status are as follows Off Idle Red You are calling a phantom extension Flashing green rapidly Incoming call To call a phantom extension While the Phantom button indicator light is off 9 di Phantom Phantom extension no r Lift the handset Press Phantom Dial the phantom Talk or press flexible button extension number SP PHONE MONITOR e The Phantom indicator light turns red steady E Phantom extension no a Lift the handset Dial the phantom extension number 350 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To transfer a call to a phantom extension Screened Call Transfer During a conversation h di TRANSFER u 9 J E Press Phantom Ringback tone Press TRANSFER Dial tone flexible button Confirmation tone e You may dial the phantom extension The other party is placed on number instead consultation hold Gla Wait for an answer Announce Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR o E y a 2 The call is transferred During a conversation I gr l phantom extension no I Flash the Confirmation Dial tone Dial the destination phantom Ringback tone extension number switchhook tone 3 or 4 digits The other party is placed on consultation hold y a Eba Wait for Announce Hang up an answer The call is transferred User Manual 351 Station Features and Operation PT SLT
196. ary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 User Manual 69 Station Programming Log In Log Out Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as a Log In Log Out button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL e 2 Ee STORE Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 71 Press STORE button you wish to assign as the Log In Log Out button lt PT Display Example gt Login Logout e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Loop CO L CO Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as a Loop CO button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL STORE Press the desired Flexible Press STORE CO button you wish to assign as the L CO button lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode Loop CoO To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 70 User Manual Station Programming Message Waiting MESSAGE Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Message Waiting MESSAGE button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 3 STORE Press the desired Flexible CO Press STORE DS
197. ated when both calling and called extensions are using the KX T7400 series PTs by default If either one of them is a non KX T7400 series PT OHCA when the called extension is an OHCA capable PT or BSS is activated However Whisper OHCA between two non KX T7400 series PTs can be enabled by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 32 Whisper OHCA to extensions other than T74XX gt PT DN BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT Other conditions are the same as that of Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 2 8 System Option Whisper OHCA to extensions other than T74XX Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS User Manual 319 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting 320 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 51 Off Hook Monitor While you are on a handset call your call can be monitored by the other people in the room through SP PHONE Setting While on a handset call SP PHONE Press SP PHONE The SP PHONE indicator light turns red e Your handset call i
198. ay be charged to your account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points 1 Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password 2 Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it 3 Change the password frequently User Manual 239 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions 240 Calling an extension You can choose Non Security Trunk Security or All Security mode In All Security mode the caller must enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make intercom calls If the DISA call is not answered within a specified period of time DISA IRNA Time 60 seconds default the system redirects it to the pre determined IRNA destination If IRNA destination is not programmed the DISA call will be disconnected 10 seconds later Calling an outgoing CO line You can choose Non Security Trunk Security or All Security mode In Trunk Security mode the caller must enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make outside calls In All Security mode the caller must enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make both CO and intercom calls General If the caller does not dial any digits during and after the playback of DISA outgoing message the system will direct him to the pre determined destination Intercept Routing Intercept Routing is activated 5 seconds after default or immediately after the playback depending on System Programming DISA Delayed Answer Time A DISA ca
199. ay gt lt PT Display gt e To enter location number 000 006 CALLER ID Location NO gt youcat alse pees NEE lt PT Display Example gt 000 Not Stored Repeat these steps lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed NEXT 7 Caller ID Number fo oO Enter a Caller ID Number Press STORE Enter the desired location number 000 through 999 SELECT e To delete the current entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press NEXT or PREV or SELECT r l l I I l l l l I 1 I I l l I I I l l l 1 1 Press END Conditions e Up to 1000 Caller ID Codes per tenant 2000 per system can be assigned e Program 007 Caller ID Name Set is used to give names to Caller ID Codes If an ID Code is given a name the called party s telephone shows the name with the ID Code 132 User Manual User Programming Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service User Manual 133 User Programming 3 2 7 007 Caller ID Name Set Description With Caller ID Service the calling party is displayed either by its ID Code or by its name If the name display is required use this program to give a name to a Caller ID Code stored in program 006 Caller ID Dial Set Selection e Location number 000 through 999 e Caller ID Name 16 characters max consisting of 0 through 9 A through Z a th
200. ber of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two telephones For more details please consult your dealer 30 User Manual DPT Overview 1 1 4 Feature Buttons Digital Proprietary Telephones DPTs have the following types of Feature Buttons Fixed Buttons e Flexible Buttons Fixed Buttons Fixed buttons have specific functions permanently assigned to them These default function assignments cannot be changed The following table lists the fixed buttons located on each DPT model Feature Button 17420 17425 T7431 T7433 T7436 T7220 T7230 T7235 T7250 AUTO ANSWER MUTE Vv Y Y Y A V Y Y AUTO DIAL STORE Y Y Y Vv Y Vv Vv Vv v CONF Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv FLASH Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Function Y Y FWD DND Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv HOLD Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv INTERCOM Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv v Jog Dial Vv Y Y v Y MESSAGE v v vlvl v viv jyv MODE Vv MONITOR Vv PAUSE Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv PROGRAM Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv REDIAL Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv SELECT Y SHIFT V Y Vv Y Soft Y A Y Y SP PHONE Vv Vv Vv V Vv Vv Vv Vv User Manual 31 DPT Overview Feature Button T7420 T7425 T7431 T7433 T7436 T7220 T7230 T7235 T7250 TRANSFER Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv VOLUME Vv Y Y Y The button is not provided with an LED
201. bility rather than continually use he she we have only used one of these terms The term he or she should be taken as being interchangeable About the Other Manuals Along with this User Manual the following manuals are available Features Guide Describes every basic optional and programmable features of the KX TD500 System in alphabetical order Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and system maintenance Programming Guide Describes step by step instruction for performing System Programming using the Maintenance Console software for a PC User Manual 9 Telephone Company and F C C Requirements and Responsibilities Telephone Company and F C C Requirements and Responsibilities 10 Telephone Company and F C C Requirements and Responsibility 1 Notification to the Telephone Company Customers before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network shall upon request of the Telephone Company inform the Telephone Company of the particular line s to which such connection is made the F C C registration number see the label on the bottom of the unit and ringer equivalence number REN of the registered terminal equipment The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line
202. busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions Calling extension Called extension Call Waiting setting COS OHCA OFF ON assignment 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS OHCA gt W OHCA gt Pu Ee BSS OHCA BSS t OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 2 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PTs If the other extension is provided with Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA function KX T7130 KX T7235 KX T7436 you can announce through the speaker Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 176 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 9 Call Forwarding Automatically transfers incoming calls to the pre assigned extension or to an external party The following types are available Type Description Call Forwarding All incoming calls are
203. c Features Loe c TRK Route CTL PHY A Lift the handset or Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press Press TRK Route CTL press SP PHONE NEXT until the following is displayed trunk port physical no Enter the trunk port physical number TRK Route CTL PHY SELECT MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT press SP PHONE Feature Access TRK Route CTL is is displayed displayed trunk port physical no Enter the trunk port physical number User Manual 455 Station Features and Operation PT SLT A Cc Lift the handset or Press SHIFT Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until press SP PHONE until FEAT is TRK Route CTL is displayed at the arrow 7 TRK Route CTL UCD Monitor End MENU SEL cos oO COO oo trunk port physical no Press SEL Enter the trunk port physical number PT and SLT 7 2 4 trunk port physical no Lift the handset or press Dial 724 Enter the trunk port SP PHONE MONITOR physical number Conditions e This feature does not override Toll Restriction by COS or the Tenant Service e When the outside call made using a specific trunk is busy on another call the Manager or the Operators can join the existing outside call by dialing 2 after hearing a busy tone Programming Guide Reference e 2 3 Numbering Plan Trunk Route Control e 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override F
204. cation is left on the Call Forwarding setting extension regardless of a type of Call Forwarding feature except for To CO TIE Line and No Answer to CO TIE Line Station Hunting Station Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in a Station Hunting group 181 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 182 Confirmation tone Confirmation tone 2 two beeps is sent when the previously programmed data is same as the new data If it is not confirmation tone 1 one beep is sent Please refer to Section 6 1 3 Tone List for further information on tones You can call the original extension from the Call Forwarding destination extension PT Both the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb DND features can be programmed at the same time but either one of them can be activated at a time You can enable or disable Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb DND feature by pressing the FWD DND button while on hook In this case pressing the button changes the setting as follows a gt FWD Eai The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows Off Both features are not set Red on DND mode Red flash FWD mode This setting can be changed by System Programming Station or User Programming mode This feature functions even if the extension is in Station or User Programming mode Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once The Manager and the Operators can reach an extension that has set Call F
205. cess code can be stored and redialed e X PAUSE and INTERCOM for secret dialing are counted as one digit e If Full One Touch Dialing feature is enabled at the extension there is no need to go off hook before pressing the REDIAL or SAVE button Last Number e The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit sent to a CO line is dialed Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized number e PT If you hear a busy tone when attempting to redial select another line and press the REDIAL button Saved Number e SAVE button If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT it is possible to assign a flexible button CO DSS PF to be the SAVE button by Station User or System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Redial e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Redial 1 16 Button Features e Button Flexible User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 362 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual 363 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 67 Released Link Operation When Released Link Operation is enabled by System Programming you will be automatically released from a call
206. d CO line or the called party becomes idle e Call Log Incoming Option allows you to confirm the incoming CO call information on the display You can also call back the caller by selecting one of the memorized numbers This feature is available only for the KX T7230 K X T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 User Manual 7 Introduction e Call Log Outgoing redials by selecting one of the last five CO calls you made according to the number information on the display e Conference Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties you can leave the conference and allow the other two parties to continue the conversation You can also return to the conference e Data Line Security prohibits various tones such as call waiting tone or hold recall tone from sounding at the extension in the data communication mode It also blocks overriding by other extensions such as Executive Busy Override e Doorphone and Door Opener Option enables the conversation between you and a visitor at door You can also unlock the door a few seconds from your phone e Executive Busy Override allows you to enter into an existing conversation at an extension CO line e Full One Touch Dialing allows you to have easy access to a desired party or system feature by pressing just one button e Message Waiting allows you to leave a message notification for another extension The message waiting lamp MESSAGE indicator gives a visual indicat
207. d for the pre programmed amount of time default 5 s lt PT Display Example gt Door 1 Open door opener number m Flash the Confirmation Dial 5 Confirmation Hang up switchhook tone and tone dial tone The door is left unlocked for the pre programmed amount of time default 5 s Conditions 252 e Ifyou dial 5 again while the door is open the door will stay open for another five seconds e Doorphone Call Destination It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive doorphone calls during day and night mode User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT What if a doorphone call is not answered If not answered within 30 seconds the call stops ringing and is canceled Unlocking the door opener During a doorphone call any extension user can unlock the door opener user supplied from their extensions by dialing 5 to let the visitor in You cannot hold and transfer the doorphone call The door can be unlocked by the following 1 Extensions that are programmed to receive doorphone calls 2 Any extension that is engaged in a doorphone call While talking to a doorphone you can unlock the door using the One Touch dialing button instead of dialing 5 In this case 5 must be stored in the One Touch dialing button by Station User or System Programming With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can call a doorphone and open a door using the display operation
208. d on a PT a flexible CO DSS button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button by Station User or System Programming PT VPS Integration If VPS Integration is employed a VM extension informs an extension that a message is left in his mailbox by turning on the MESSAGE lamp The extension user can listen to the message in the mailbox simply by pressing the red lit MESSAGE lamp Call Forwarding A message waiting notification is left on the Call Forwarding setting extension regardless of a type of Call Forwarding feature except for To CO TIE Line and No Answer to CO TIE Line Station Hunting A message waiting notification to an extension in the station hunting group is treated in the same manner as the ordinary call With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can set or cancel this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References 300 2 3 Numbering Plan Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back 2 8 System Option Message Waiting lamp pattern 4 3 Extension Line Message Lamp CO Key 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 5 10 VPS Integration Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration Voice Mail VM Service 1 17 Display Features e Message Waiting User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button
209. e line of the desired item instead of the SEL S3 button When using a KX T7436 you can press the Feature F4 button in any display initial through third Before rotating the Jog Dial you can press the corresponding alphabet key to select the desired letter lt Example gt Press 2 twice to display B items You can access the following features which are displayed in alphabetical order For more details about the features and the required parameters please refer to the respective features in Section 4 3 Station Features and Operation and Section 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features Display KX T7436 KX T7235 Display KX T7431 KX T7433 Feature Description Absent MSG Off Absent MSG On s1 9 BSY Out Cancel PHY BSY Out Confirm gt PHY BSY Out Set sPHY ABST MSG Off ABST MSG On 1 9 BSY Out Cancel BSY Out Confirm BSY Out Set Cancel the absent message Set an absent message Cancel the Trunk Busy out setting Confirm the Trunk Busy out setting Busy out a specific trunk 497 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Display KX T7436 KX T7235 Display KX T7431 KX T7433 Feature Description Busy Ovrd Deny gt 1 0 C Pickup CO C Pickup Deny gt 1 0 C Pickup Direct ext C Pickup Group C Waiting 0 3 Call Park 00 99 Callback Busy Cancel COS Primary ext COS Secondary
210. e RS 232C port 1 PT and SLT oy j ON 9 1 AT Command no cba Lift the handset or press Dial 791 Enter the AT Command Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR number 1 through 5 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR 1 for Command 1 2 for Command 2 3 for Command 3 4 for Command 4 5 for Command 5 lt PT Display Example gt MODEM command X ioe AT Command number Conditions e An AT Command can only be programmed by Serial Interface remote programming software e For more information about the AT Command please refer to the modem instructions e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan MODEM Control e 10 2 External Modem 1 2 Manual Initialization Command 1 5 Automatic Initialization Command e 10 3 External Modem 2 2 Connection Message 1 5 Disconnection Message 1 5 e 10 6 System Parameters 268 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Serial Interface Port PROG Port 1 Features Guide References 1 2 System Administration e System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 1 3 System Features e External Modem Control User Manual References e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu Us
211. e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name Press END Conditions NEXT SELECT speed dial no Enter the desired speed dial number 000 through 999 Press NEXT or PREV or SELECT e Speed dial numbers are programmed in program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e There is a maximum of 1000 names with a maximum of 10 characters for each e For entering characters please refer to Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only User Manual 121 User Programming User Manual References e 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing 122 User Manual User Programming 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the extension numbers Selection e Extension number 3 or 4 digits e Name 10 characters max Default All extension ports Not Stored User Manual 123 User Programming Programming Display PT KEKEKE ey lt a Dial 004 Press NEXT Enter an extension number 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display gt lt PT Display gt e To enter the lowest extension 004 EXT NAME SET EXT NO gt number you can also press NEXT lt PT Display Example gt 1001 Not Stored lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed NEXT fo oO extension no Enter a name Press STORE Enter the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits SELECT
212. e assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming e Ifthe other party you called is in one of the following status you can terminate the current call and call a new party by pressing the FLASH button the other party does not answer the call the other party refuses to join a five party conference call the other party is a Voice Mail extension Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Park Call Park Retrieve e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key User Manual 229 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 5 Party User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 230 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 23 Conference Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties you can leave the three party conference allowing the other two parties to continue their conversation To establish an Unattended Conference During a conversation with two outside parties CONF Press CONF to leave the conference A CO to CO line call between the other two parties is established To return to the conference call Press CO or DN flashing green moderately To answer Hold Recall To return to the conference on the line While hearing Hold Reca
213. e gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode VTR CLR lt PT Display Example gt VTR XXXX xxxx VM extension number CLR e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 526 User Manual DSS Console Features To correct an error while programming 7230 7235 7433 7436 Paired telephone CLR Press CLR S2 Paired telephone TRANSFER Press TRANSFER CLEAR The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button when using the overlay To erase after programming PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone DSS PF n A FJ EA Press the desired DSS or PF button Conditions Paired telephone AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE e DSS buttons can be changed to any of the following feature buttons by Station User or System Programming User Manual 527 DSS Console Features a Account Button b Another DSS Button Every DSS button can be assigned to another extension number c Answer Button d Conference CONF Button e FWD DND Button f Group CO G CO Button g Live Call Screening LCS Button h Live Call Screening LCS Cancel Button i Message Waiting Owner Extension Button j Message
214. e recorded DISA message This message is played when an outside caller accesses the system via DISA line Timed Reminder wake up message This message is used in Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder alarm often used as a wake up call the extension user will hear this message UCD Uniform Call Distribution message This message is played to the outside callers in conjunction with UCD feature OGM Type OGM Type is decided on an OGM Group basis by System Programming Before recording your OGM you must assign its OGM Group No to a physical card DISA Port Assignment Hardware Requirements A DISA card KX T96191 is required to record an OGM Up to eight DISA cards can be installed in the system User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e OGM Group Recording of OGM is performed per OGM Group 1 8 which consists of one or more DISA cards Up to eight OGM Groups are available in the system e Before recording your OGM you must assign its OGM Group No to a physical card DISA Port Assignment Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed the affiliation of OGM Group should be decided by System Programming Installation Manual References e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Programming Guide References e 1 7 DISA Port Assignment e 2 3 Numbering Plan OGM Playback Record e 3 6 OGM Group FDN Tenant No OGM Type Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing M
215. e until the STORE button is pressed lt DPT Display Example gt TONS EY OR Ys x tone type number If you want to change the tone type enter another tone type number To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is Ringing Tone Type 2 e This feature applies to the following line access buttons S CO G CO L CO PDN SDN User Manual 95 Station Programming 2 2 14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to the INTERCOM button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL INTERCOM INTERCOM tone type no STORE Press INTERCOM Press INTERCOM again Enter the tone type number Press STORE 1 through 8 The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial The display shows the current programming mode status The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear the selected tone until the STORE button is pressed lt DPT Display Example gt tone be x tone type number If you want to change the tone type enter another tone type number To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is Ringing Tone Type 3 96 User Manual Station Programming 2 2 15 Self Extension Number Confirmation Allows you to display your extension port physical number and ex
216. eature calling to a pre set party by going off hook Pickup DL Prg gt Pickup DL PG Store the extension or phone number to call a party by going off hook Remote DND gt ext Remote DND Set or cancel the DND feature set at other extensions Remote Timed Reminder R Timed Remind Set the alarm ringing time for any extension Station Lock abcabc St Lock abcabc Prevent other people from making an outgoing CO call from your extension User Manual 499 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Display Display gia KX 17436 KX T7235 KX 17431 KX T7433 pede pecupnen Station Program Clear STA Prog Clear Clear the features set at your telephone Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set the alarm ringing time TRK Route CTL PHY TRK Route CTL Verify the status of a specific trunk UCD Monitor End UCD Monitor End Cancel the monitoring of a UCD Group UCD Monitor STRT FDN UCD Monitor STR Start the monitoring of a UCD Group Walking COS scode ext WK COS code ext Call using your privileges at another extension 1 Only available for the Manager and the Operators 2 After selecting this message follow the steps as follows KX T7436 steps of the Timed Reminder feature in KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu Features on the Ninth Display in this section KX T7431 and KX T7433 steps after dialing the feature number 761 and 1 of 4 3
217. eature Access Menu 472 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 6 Call Log Outgoing KX T7436 KX T7235 only The last five outside telephone numbers Up to 24 digits for each you made are automatically logged You can make a call using the call log Initial Display WED JANO1 03 00P Extension STA Speed Features SYS Speed Call Log lt Example gt To select 111 1234567890 111 0987654 000111222333 100200300400500 MENU CLR Making a call using a call log Notes 1 Press the Call Log F5 button e To delete all numbers press the CLR S2 2 Press the Function button which is next to the button desired number e To return to the initial display press the MENU S1 button User Manual 473 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 7 KX T7235 Display Features The KX T7235 telephone allows you to make a call or operate the features using the display message with the Function buttons 1 Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 2 System Feature Access Menu The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in alphabetical order The available features are as follows Absent Message Capability Message Waiting Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Canc
218. eatures Guide References 1 3 System Features e Trunk Route Control 456 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References None User Manual 457 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 4 5 1 458 Special Display Features Special Display Features With the display telephone KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 or KX T7436 you can easily access several features The display telephones have the ability to perform the following features Feature Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Call Information Display Call Log Incoming Call Log Incoming Log Lock Call Log Outgoing Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing System Feature Access Menu f indicates the feature is available Helpful Information about Display Operation Press CONT S1 to adjust the display contrast Press RING S2 to adjust the ringer volume Press BGM S3 to turn on off the BGM Press MENU S1 to return to the initial display Press PREV S2 to return to the previous display Press NEXT S3 to advance to the next display Press ACCNT S3 to enter an account code Press CALL S3 to call the desired party Press SELECT S3 to select the desired feature User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 2 Call Forwarding Do N
219. eave an incoming group Assign the password for the Live Call Screening feature Deny other people from seeing your call log 498 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Display Display ee KX 17436 KX 17235 KX T7431 KX 17433 Pane ee Log Ovrt On Off 1 0 Log Ovrt 1 0 Select how the 31st call is treated either it is disregarded or overwrites the oldest call Login Logout 1 0 Login out 1 0 Join or leave an extension group Message Off ext MSG Off ext Cancel a message waiting notification Message On ext MSG On ext Leave a message waiting notification so that the called party may call you back Night Mode 0 4 Night Mode 0 4 Change the day night mode OGM Playback 1 8 OGM Play 1 8 Playback the outgoing message OGM Recording 1 8 OGM Record 1 8 Record an outgoing message Page Deny On Off 1 0 Page Deny 1 0 Deny or allow being paged Page Ext Answer 1 2 Page E ANS 1 2 Answer the page through an external speaker Page GRP Answer Page GRP ANS Answer the page through a telephone speaker in the same paging group Paging External 0 2 Page Extrn 0 2 Page through the external speaker Paging Group gt 01 16 Page GRP 01 16 Page to all or a particular paging group Parallel On Off 31 0 Parallel 1 0 Set whether a Single Line Telephone connected in parallel will ring or not when receiving a call Pickup Dialing 1 0 Pickup Dial 1 0 Set or cancel the f
220. eceiver you will know that a call has been received by the MESSAGE button light and an indication tone which you will hear when going off hook If you receive a notification you can call the original party back with a simple operation If required you can assign a Flexible CO button as the Another Extension Message Waiting button or the Phantom Extension Message Waiting button by program 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment For details consult your dealer or manager Setting PT and SLT gt o 4 f phantom extension no Lift the handset or press Dial 701 Dial the extension number or the phantom extension number SP PHONE MONITOR 3 or 4 digits where a message notification will be left v Gla Confirmation Hang up or press tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone If the called extension or the phantom extension number is busy or does not answer Mp E MESSAGE qin y E J Ga Press MESSAGE Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR User Manual 297 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling PT and SLT gt o 0 or phantom extension no Lift the handset or press Dial 700 Dial the extension number or the phantom extension number SP PHONE MONITOR 3 or 4 digits where you left a message notification v Eba Confirmation Hang up or press tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone Checking and Selecting a message waiting notification by the recei
221. ecescecseceneecseeeeeeeneeees 96 2 2 15 Self Extension Number Confirmation cceceessessecesseseeceseceseeseeeeeeecaaecsaeesaeesseeees 97 2 2 16 Station Programming Data Default Set eee ceneceeceeeceseeeceeeeecaaeceaecsaeenseeees 98 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX E7433 KX 17436 only Jire rnein a tela se terete bie terete 99 3 User Programming 3 1 User Programming Instructions ccssssscssssssscssscssscsscsscceseccssesscssssessessssssscssens 108 3 1 1 General Programming Instructions 0 0 0 eseesecsecesseceeceseeeeeeseeeeeaeesaeceaaesaeeeseeees 108 3 1 2 Programming Methods 2 c s0 c2e 20 i iiecce ci gest dada heats caidedasentuesededie a a i 112 3 2 USer Program Mine os cs ccavcseseseiescsescvsscsscecesetcessasetvecssencteasetavesscsdcessssacvessedsvessseaverssecere 114 3 22 10 gt OOO Date and Time S ticisssvosces cas ceed ssvgenedsuaseess sd coceesseteesaaek E ete neees awecle 114 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 00 cee ceeeceeeeeeeceseeeeeeeseesaeeeaeesseesseeens 117 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set ieee escesseeeseceseceseceseeeseeeseesaaeesaessaeens 120 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set ccccccccccccccssssssscecceccesenssseceecsesessseceeececcesssseaeeeeesenenaes 123 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment cccceccseceeseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaceseaeeceeeeenteeesas 126 3 2 6 006 Caller ID Dial Sets sxccstecsecceey aide ates ates ci
222. ed Dialing can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits e PT One Touch Dialing A PT user may make a call with One Touch Dialing button instead of Station Speed Dialing 374 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e The SLT may be replaced with a PT temporarily to store One Touch dialing into memory The Function Buttons F1 through F10 correspond to speed dial numbers as follows Fl 0 F2 1 F3 2 F4 3 F5 4 F6 5 F7 6 F8 7 F9 8 F10 9 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing Station Programming e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e One Touch Dialing e Station Speed Dialing User Manual References e 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only e 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory e 45 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory User Manual 375 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing Allows you to make a call using speed dial numbers programmed previously This system supports 2000 speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users PT and SLT AUTO DIAL For PT Q STORE PS system speed dial no For SLT PT
223. ed not only from your extension but from any other extension in the same tenant Call Hold Retrieve Preventing other extension users from retrieving a call held at your extension is also possible PT user only Exclusive Call Hold In this case the call can only be retrieved from your extension Holding a call regular During a conversation During a conversation Up h HOLD a yY C Confirmation tone Press HOLD Confirmation tone Flash the switchhook and dial tone and dial tone hy ni e You may replace the handset 5 o i J Confirmation tone e The corresponding CO or INTERCOM or DN Dial 50 and dial tone indicator light flashes green slowly e You may replace the handset Retrieving a call held at your extension At your extension At your extension Q CO INTERCOM DN CE or LE or FO ts ESEA Press the CO or INTERCOM or DN Lift the handset Dial 50 that is flashing green slowly The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light turns steady green User Manual 189 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Retrieving an outside call held at another extension PT and SLT At another extension Q fr e 5 Es trunk port physical no al J Lift the handset or press Dial 53 Enter the held Confirmation SP PHONE MONITOR trunk port physical tone number optional At another extension CO Press CO whose indicator Confirmation is flashing red slowly tone
224. ed number press the CLR 2 Press the OLD S1 or NEW S2 button to see S2 button the confirmed or unconfirmed information e The PREV S3 button appears by pressing the Press the NEXT S3 or PREV S2 button to SHIFT button while confirming When a new call is logged the display changes see other caller s information Or modify the to the second display automatically number if required To call back go off hook and then press the CALL S1 button Conditions e This feature is available for KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 only e Ifa Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 call is forwarded by Call Forwarding or IRNA feature the data will be logged at both the forwarding and forwarded extension e You can lock the display so that incoming call information is not shown on the display e If you modify the displayed telephone number the new number will be memorized e With the KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can set or cancel overwriting the call log using the System Feature Access Menu on the Fifth Display Installation Manual References e 2 5 5 ELCOT Card KX TD50180 e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 e 2 7 4 Caller ID Card KX TD193 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 2 8 System Option Automatic adjustment of the clock using Caller ID information e 4 2 Trunk Line Name e 4 3 Exten
225. eeeeeeceeaeceeaeeceteeees 412 AAS Vocal Ala eraa raresa EER A OAA Ra eh a eiei 413 4 4 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback eee eeesseceseceteceseceeeeeneeeseeeaeeenaees 417 4 4 7 Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control 0 c ce ccccecccscceessseeceseececesseeeeeeeseeeeseeeees 426 4 4 8 Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once 20 eeceeccceeeseeeeteceeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeteeees 430 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control ccc ccccccccsssceceesseeceesseceeeseecessseeeeceeeseeeeseseeeesseeeeees 434 44 10 Switching COS iss teena esrara ran Tene re teins ea tee ms de ean ee 436 4 4 11 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call 0 ccc cccccccscceceeeeceeeeeseeeeeaeeceaeeeeteeees 439 4 4 12 Trunk Busy Out Setting 24 oe cg vcinc veces E e a e i tient 449 4 4 13 Trunk Route Controls nansa densi otibava ca tease ia Eai 455 4 5 Special Display Features ccsccsssscssssssssssssssscsscsssscssscsssssscsecssssssssssssssssssssssssseces 458 4 5 1 Special Display Features 20 0 0 eccccccccesenceceeeeeesecesceceeaaeseacecceaeeeaeceeaecseaaeseaeeeeeaeees 458 4 5 2 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb KX T7436 KX T7235 only 459 4 5 3 Call Information Display KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 461 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 464 4 5 5 Call Log Incoming Log Lock KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 471 4 5 6 Call Log Outgoing KX T7436 KX T7235 only oo eeccceeecee
226. eeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeesaeens 473 45 7 KX 17235 Display Feat resi nua toires nicest ae E EA ER a 474 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory 00 0 eeccecccceeeeceeeceeeeceeeaeeceeeeeeeaeees 475 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 477 4 5 10 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features 0 000 000 eee eeeceescceeeneeeeeteees 487 4 5 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory 490 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 496 5 DSS Console Features 5 1 Configuration ssvsecccscsesscccsceseccssesesecesesesesescesesesoscssecseccssesesesesessesessesesesssascesvenestsvsesesiis 502 5 041 Confipuration wai c x comedian are Se et 502 5 1 2 Location of Controls i cicaedeiensaseacaccdceeacaacshedae Gees sateebes cunts heen hedeseseveunaeteanees 503 Ja Fedre Buttons sesso he nde eth eth Ea ee al 505 5 2 DSS Console Features sscccsssssscsscsssccscessecssssssssessssscsscssssseessessesscsesssssesersesees 506 5 2 Station Programming wii iene te enor ER AE 506 5 2 2 Account Button ASSIGNMENT sssi cccesseceececesteeesaeceeaeceeaeeceneeeesaeceaaeceeaeeneeeeeeaees 507 5 2 3 Answer Button Assignment 0 eeeccecccceeseeceeeeeeeeesaeceeaeceeaeeceeeeesaecesaecseaeeceeeeeeaees 508 5 2 4 Conference CONF Button Assignment ccc cceeccecseeceesceceeeceeeeeeneeceeaeceeaeeeeaes 509 5 2 5 DAY NIGHT Button Assignment 0
227. eesaeecaeesaeceaeceeeeeneeees 524 5 2 20 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment 00 eee eeecceeceeeeeeeeeseeceeeaeceaeceeeeeeeees 525 5 2 21 Voice Mail VM Transfer Button Assignment 00 cecceccceceeceeeeneeeeneeceeeeeeeneeees 526 5 2 22 Direct Station Dialing nnen nieee aa bette eet ta fe ees fee Qe eae 530 5 2 23 One Totich Dialing i see onesies wee ee AG ed en Slade as 531 5 2 24 One Touch Access for System Features cee ceeccesceeeeeseeseeeeeecsseesaecsseseeeesneeees 532 5 2 25 lt Call Transferten 59h sien eee een liens Gh a ete A hae a te ae 533 5 2 26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation 0 eee ceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeens 534 5 2 27 Monitoring an outside line activity 0 le ce esecseceseceeceeeeeeeeseeeesaeesaecsaaesseenseenes 536 6 Appendix 6l APPONIK anirai ninss rissie iE siS ENT ETES EEEE A R A 538 6 11 Display Examples siiin an e a a a a a aa eee he as 538 6 1 2 Feature Numbers List onnrieninoneonanenen e eei iii cere i a eat 546 61 3 Tong Lists ic ccsccfacc A shacc eaecek eE E E A A la cceterelecbsbsseeteactane 551 OLA Troubleshooting neern leteieg terse tessa reseeeatl eed eee ects 553 User Manual 17 Table of Contents 18 User Manual DPT Overview User Manual Section l DPT Overview Note All illustrations used in the initial setting are based on model KX T7235 19 DPT Overview 1 1 Configuration 1 1 1 Configuration Panasonic Digital Propr
228. el Night Service On Off Background Music BGM External Outgoing Message OGM Call Log Incoming Paging External Call Log Incoming Log Lock Paging Group Call Park Paging ANSWER Call Pickup CO Line Paging DENY Call Pickup Directed Paralleled Telephone Connection Call Pickup Group Pickup Dialing Hot Line Call Pickup Deny Remote DND Do Not Disturb Call Waiting Remote FWD Cancel Once Data Line Security Station Program Clear Door Opener Switching COS Doorphone Call Timed Reminder Electronic Station Lockout Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Executive Busy Override Deny Trunk Busy out Setting External Modem Control Trunk Route Control Group Call FWD UCD Monitor Mode Group Log In Log Out Walking COS Live Call Screening LCS Password Set Log In Log Out 474 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory You can make a call using the call directory by pressing the desired button which is corresponding to the display message The example operations are shown below Initial Display WED JANO1 03 00P Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing Makes an intercom call Extension STA Speed Makes a call to a party using the directory Features SYS Speed stored in your phone Call Log CONT RING BGM lt Example gt
229. em Programming on a Class of Service basis Entering account codes before dialing 7230 7235 7433 7436 K 4 oy ys SS Lift the handset or press Press ACCNT S3 Dial tone 3 Enter an account code Dial Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR 10 digits max 0 9 and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt Enter ACCNT Code ao e Press CO Dial the phone number One of the dial tones Refer to the Tone List in the Appendix PT and SLT Account LL For PT hy par 4 Lo a aoa For SLT PT Lift the handset or press For PT Press Account Dial tone 3 Enter an account code SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button 10 digits max 0 9 For SLT PT Dial 49 CO l CL you hear no tone ng line access code phone no e If you dial a feature number Confirmation tone Press CO or enter a line Dial the phone number and dial tone access code 9 or 801 through 848 One of the dial tones Refer to the Tone List in the Appendix Class of Service COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions User Manual 159 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Entering account codes during or after a conversation During a conversation or within 15 seconds after the other party hangs up 7230 7235 7433 7436 account code BI 53 Press ACCNT S3 Enter account code Dial Pr
230. ent A conference call can be one of the following three arrangements 1 inside and 2 outside 2 inside and 1 outside and 3 inside e Conference trunk Up to eight conference calls are available at a time by default If optional TSW Conference Expansion card is installed up to 64 conference calls are available at a time e Executive Busy Override Privacy Release A 3 party conference call is also established by Executive Busy Override or Privacy Release e Confirmation tone When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party conference call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable e PT Pressing a CO button which is not in the conference allows you to exit from the conference User Manual 225 Station Features and Operation PT SLT leaving the other two parties connected unless they both are on CO lines If they both are on CO lines they will be disconnected PT You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the TRANSFER button If a CONF button is not provided on your PT it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming Call Splitting During a 3 party conference call the conference originator can talk to either one of other two parties alternately by pressing the TRANSFER button for PT user or flashing the switchhook for SLT user In this case the PT user is connected with t
231. er Manual 269 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 37 Flash You can disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up While hearing any tone dialing or talking h FLASH pa esac Press FLASH Dial tone Dial the phone number Conditions e PT Flash or External Feature Access Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal External Feature Access or disconnecting the current call Flash This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 3 FLASH button operation while CO talking and 4 FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 in the Programming Guide gt PT Pressing the FLASH button re starts the conversation duration outputs an SMDR record and checks toll restriction level again Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option FLASH button operation while CO talking FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 e 3 2 Trunk Group Disconnecting Time Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e External Feature Access e Flash User Manual References e 43 35 External Feature Access 270 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 38 Full One Touch Dialing The hands free speakerphone is automatically activated You can enter a phone number or access a system feature with the touch of a button REDIAL
232. er consisting of 25 digits or more by dividing it and assigning it in two One Touch Dialing buttons In this case the line access code should be stored in the first button e You can use 0 through 9 x PAUSE FLASH CONF and INTERCOM for storing FLASH hook flash PAUSE pause CONF hyphen INTERCOM for secret dialing x for changing the dialing mode Pulse to Tone e KX T7220 and KX T7250 telephones do not have a PAUSE button The PROGRAM button can be used instead of the PAUSE button while programming 72 User Manual Station Programming Phantom Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as a Phantom button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL CO oO 2 phantom extension no Press the desired Flexible Dial 72 Enter the phantom extension Press STORE CO button you wish to number 3 or 4 digits assign as a Phantom button STORE lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial Phantom programming mode CLR lt PT Display Example gt Phantom xXxxx CLR xxxx Phantom extension number To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The phantom e
233. er to the corresponding feature in Section 4 4 Enter the parameters Operator Manager if required Service Features ooo lt ooo oo ff On hook y GLN User Manual 477 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Second Display MENU PREV NEXT Executive Busy Override Deny s Denies or allows other Second Display people from joining your conversation Busy oye Dany C Pickup CO C Pickup Deny C Pickup Direct Call Pickup C Pickup Group Outside Line Call Pickup MENU PREV Picks up an Directed outside call for Picks up a specified another extension eriansien s call l See the next page STE Call Pickup Call Pickup Deny Group Denies or allows Picks up a call other people within an from picking up extension group Dial 1 or 0 your calls ooo j ooo oo dim Dial 1 or 0 ooo Dial the ringing 1 Deny ooo 0 Allow fr extension s number ooo ooo oo Oo On hook 1 Deny dfn 0 Allow g Gw On hook GL 478 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Third Display MENU PREV NEXT Third Display Call Waiting ae EES a C Waiting 30 3 all Waiting feature X Call Waiting OHCA PRO
234. erences 1 6 Originating Features e Inter Office Calling 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS e Button Line Access 1 17 Display Features e Busy Lamp Field User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory e 45 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory User Manual 281 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 43 Live Call Screening LCS Allows a PT user to monitor his voice mailbox while incoming callers are leaving a message and if desired intercept the call Flowchart of the Live Call Screening LCS Feature Preparation Activating the LCS mode System Programming Assigning the LCS button Station System Programming Selecting the mode Hands free or Private Station System Programming Setting the password Feature Number System Programming Setting the LCS feature 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 282 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT When using the SP PPHONE MONITOR button in the Private Mode To set LCS on e Press LCS button gt To cancel LCS
235. es and Operation PT SLT 4 3 78 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Allows you to answer an incoming CO call paged through an external pager from any extension PT and SLT ON 4 2 external pager no Lift the handset or press Dial 42 Enter an external pager Confirmation SP PHONE MONITOR number 1 to 2 tone optional e You are connected to the ringing line and can talk to the caller Conditions e TAFAS can be used in the following cases a The FDN of an external pager is assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination In this case all incoming CO calls on the specified line will be signaled b A DISA caller dials the FDN of an external pager c The FDN of an external pager is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination In this case incoming CO calls redirected to the destination will be signaled d When a TIE call comes in Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user before being connected to the caller Eliminating the tone is programmable e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Installation Manual References e 2 8 1 External Pager Paging Equipment Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Paging Answer TAFAS Answer e 2 8 System Option A Floating Directory Number FDN is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension Please refer to Section
236. ess Account Enter an account Dial 10 digits max 0 9 flexible button 10 digits max 0 9 e You can keep talking e The corresponding indicator light turns on e You can keep talking Conditions Your Account Code Entry mode is set to one of the following three modes by System Programming In Verified All Calls mode e You must always enter a system registered account code to make a CO call e If the account code you entered is not found in the System Account Code Table lt Section 5 6 Account Code in the Programming Guide gt you hear a reorder tone e You can enter any account code during and after a call after a CPC signal is detected In Verified Toll Restriction Override mode e You can override the Toll Restriction imposed on your extension by entering a system registered account code before making a CO call Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry e If the account code you entered is not found in the System Account Code Table lt Section 5 6 Account Code in the Programming Guide gt you hear a reorder tone In Option mode e You can enter any account code when needed It is possible to record a calling or called party s account code in the SMDR during a conversation or within 15 seconds after the other party hangs up e You can enter any account code during and after a call after a CPC signal is detected General e To clear and re enter the account code press
237. ess the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e DSS buttons are provided on a DSS Console without default setting You can assign the desired extension number or feature on each DSS button from the paired PT e You cannot enter non existent extension numbers User Manual Station Programming FWD DND Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as an FWD DND button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 4 STORE Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 4 Press STORE DSS PF button you wish to assign as the FWD DND button AUTO DIAL lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights FWD DND s na display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 65 Station Programming Group FWD Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Group FWD button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Press the desired Flexible Dial 98 Enter FDN of Incoming Press STORE CO DSS button you wish to group 3 or 4 digits assign as the Group FWD button e The STORE indicator lights lt PT Display Example gt
238. essage OGM e Outgoing Message OGM Group 1 5 Attended Features e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 8 Ringing Features e Timed Reminder Wake Up Call e Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call User Manual References None User Manual 425 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 7 Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control The Manager and the Operators can set cancel the DND feature to other extensions Setting Canceling 7235 7436 Cc Features Lift the handset or Press Features press SP PHONE destination extension no Confirmation tone and dial tone Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button lt PT Display Example gt DND Set EXXXX or DND Cancel EXXXX 426 o NEXT 2 c Remote DND ext A a Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT until the following is displayed Press Remote DND Gb Hang up or press SP PHONE When setting When canceling User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling SELECT Lift the handset or Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT press SP PHONE Feature Access is Remote DND is displayed displayed destination extension no 5 Gba DSS Confirmation tone Hang up or press i SP PHONE Dial desired extension anda tone number 3 or 4 digits or pre
239. essages Soft Buttons FWD DND Button era S1 through S3 SHIFT Button CONF Button YS x SS INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Jog Dial SP PHONE Button Microphone To lift or set down the display To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button 2 Lift up the display To set down the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button 2 Press down the display LCD ADJ button 24 User Manual DPT Overview KX T7436 Display Liquid Crystal Display With 24 character 6 line readout Function Buttons Shows the date time dialed number or name F1 through F5 call duration time etc In Programming mode it shows the programming messages Flexible CO Buttons Soft Buttons Outside lines 01 through 24 S1 through S3 PROGRAM Button Function Buttons F6 through F10 FWD DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button J Vi SHIFT Button PAUSE Button MESSAGE Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button Wy AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button REDIAL Button IS FLASH Button HOLD Button Jog Dial SP PHONE Button Microphone To lift or set down the display To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button 2 Lift up the display To set down the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button 2 Press down the display poe anon User Manual 25 DPT Overview KX T7220 Flexible CO Buttons MESSAGE Button Outside lines 01 through 24 FWD DND Button CONF Button EX 3 KVESS 7
240. f times Or if you keep rotating the Jog Dial after pressing any dialing key all of the characters in the table will be displayed Combination Table 1 SHIFT amp S1 SHIFT S2 SHIFT S3 SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT Soft S1 S2 S3 SHIFT SHIFT Combination S1 S2 Pressing SELECT Times 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 keys 1 1 Q q Z Z 2 2 A a B b C c 3 3 D d E e F f 4 4 G g H h I i 5 5 J j K k L 1 6 6 M m N n O o 7 7 P p Q q R r S s 8 8 T t U u V v 9 9 W w X x Y y Z Z 0 0 Space x x lt gt o amp User Manual 103 Station Programming Combination Table 2 Rotating Jog Dial Pulses 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 keys 1 1 Q q R r S s T t 2 2 A a B b C c D d 3 3 D d E e F f G g 4 4 G g H h I i J j 5 5 J j K k L i M m 6 6 M m N n O o P p 7 7 P p Q q R T S s 8 8 T t U u V v W w 9 9 W w X x Y y Z Z 0 0 Space i x x E lt gt amp a 104 lt Example gt To enter Mike Using the SELECT button See Combination Table 1 1 Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter M 2 Press 4 and then press the SELECT button six times to enter i 3 Press 5 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter k 4 Press 3 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter e Using the
241. fication Restriction CLIR Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR gt Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment e 1 9 PRI Port Assignment e 2 3 Numbering Plan CLIP e 4 2 Trunk Line Subscriber e 4 3 Extension Line CLIP Number Public CLIP Number Private e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line CLIP Number Public CLIP Number Private Features Guide References 2 2 ISDN Originating Features e Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP e Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR User Manual References e 4 3 20 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR 220 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 20 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR When making an outside call through an ISDN line you can prevent the other party from seeing you identification number name You can change the setting at any time for a particular call This is one of the ISDN supplementary service To restrict the presentation of your number name to the other party PT and SLT h ip D me ro slo 2 D LEN Gba Lift the handset or press Dial 592 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt CLIR ON To present your number name to the other party PT and S
242. ft the handset or press Dial 7611 Enter the hour Enter the minute SP PHONE MONITOR 01 through 12 00 through 59 fo _ g Gla For AM Dial 0 For a one time alarm Dial 0 Confirmation Hang up or press For PM Dial 1 For a daily alarm Dial 1 tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone An alarm will be heard at the preset time and then the setting is cleared 2 An alarm will be heard daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled 378 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling PT and SLT h ye lt Clete wy 5 Gla Lift the handset or press Dial 7610 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt Alarm Cancelled Checking the setting time Display PT o Cee Lift the handset or press Dial 7612 Dial tone SP PHONE If 10 10 AM has been set lt PT Display Example gt Alarm 10 10AM one time or Alarm 10 10AM daily Stopping the alarm PT and SLT Lift the handset e Pressing any key also stops the alarm PT only User Manual SP PHONE MONITOR y ai Hang up or press SP PHONE 379 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Unanswered Timed Reminder Alert PT only If an extension user has not responded to the wake up call the Alert button assigned on the Alert Extension light turns red T
243. functions when Automatic Route Selection ARS is not activated If ARS is activated by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Automatic Route Selection in the Programming Guide gt the least expensive route for the destination is selected automatically Local Hunt Sequence An idle CO line is selected from the Trunk Group assigned to the extension If multiple Trunk Groups are available the Trunk Group hunting sequence is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 6 Local Hunt Sequence in the Programming Guide gt For ICM type PT only Dialing the CO line access code default 9 selects a CO button on a PT according to the priority as follows S CO gt G CO gt L CO on a hunted Trunk Group By pressing an idle CO button the hands free operation mode is established and you can perform On Hook Dialing There is no need to press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button or lift the handset Individual Trunk ARS Override If Automatic Route Selection ARS is activated it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the S CO button Trunk Group Line Hunting Order An idle CO line in a Trunk Group is selected in one of the following three line hunting orders Normal Reverse default Sequential This is determined by System Programming lt Section 3 2 Trunk Group Line Hunting Order in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References User Manual 2 2 Tenant Automatic Route Selection 2 3 Numbering
244. g and Transfer There are three types of paging as shown below You can select the appropriate type according to your needs Type Description Paging All Paging through both built in speakers of PTs and external pagers simultaneously Paging through all external pagers simultaneously Paging External Paging through a specific external pager PTs Paging to all paging groups through built in speakers of Paging Group Paging to a particular paging group through built in speakers of PTs Allows the PT user to deny receiving a paging announcement through built in speaker of his own PT Paging Deny Paging All To access all external pagers and paging groups PT and SLT l pA J Gere J QR Lift the handset Dial 32 Confirmation tone Announce or press Optional SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt All Call Page e You may dial 33 X instead User Manual co c2 Wait for Talk an answer 333 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Paging External To access all external pagers PT and SLT Mp R Gam 2 EF Lift the handset or press Dial 320 Confirmation tone Announce Wait for Talk SP PHONE MONITOR optional an answer lt PT Display Example gt Extrnl Page All Paging External To access a particular pager PT and SLT Ny pe gt ESES external pager no 9 ca a ca Lif
245. g mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 93 Station Programming Prime Line Preference Outgoing Assignment 94 When you go off hook to make a call you are connected to a line assigned as the prime line automatically Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL 1 3 m Press the desired line access Press STORE button Selection ICM S CO G CO L CO PDN SDN The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode STORE The display shows the current status lt PT Display Example gt Pref Out ICM When ICM is selected To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Note e If your PT is DN type then you cannot select ICM User Manual Station Programming 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to each CO S CO G CO L CO or DN PDN SDN button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL oOo oOo tone type no fo STORE Press CO PDN or SDN Press the same CO PDN Enter the tone type number Press STORE which you wish to or SDN again 1 through 8 change the ringing tone The STORE indicator lights The display shows the current The display shows the initial status programming mode The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear the selected ton
246. g the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Station Program Clear Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Station Program Clear User Manual References e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 373 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 72 Station Speed Dialing Allows you to store up to 10 speed dial numbers at your extension These numbers are available for your extension only Storing the phone number PT and SLT h ip A g gt 3 0 station speed dial no desired no j Y G Wa Lift the handset Dial 30 Enter the station speed Enter the Dial Confirmation Hang up or press or press dial number 0 through 9 desired number tone and dial SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR tone Dialing PT and SLT Ro ETB mca Lift the handset or press Dial 3X Enter the station speed SP PHONE MONITOR dial number 0 through 9 Conditions e You can store an extension number a telephone number or a feature number up to 24 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 gt and PAUSE button For SLT users PAUSE pausing time can be stored by dialing x e To store the telephone number of an outside party the line access code 9 or 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit e Station Spe
247. ge a call waiting tone is sent if programmed beforehand The extension user can put the current call on hold before accessing LCS e PT LCS button LCS Cancel button A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as an LCS LCS Cancel button e PT LCS Password Clear To prevent unauthorized monitoring a 3 digit password must be set by the extension user If the user forgets their password it can be cleared by the Manager extension or an Operator e PT Recording Mode Each extension can be programmed to either stop or continue recording the conversation after intercepting the recording in order to talk with the caller e SLT LCS by an SLT only in Private Mode An SLT which is connected with a PT in parallel can also be used to monitor a message being recorded Be sure that Live Call Screening on the connected PT has been activated e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Live Call Screening e 4 3 Extension Line LCS Setting Status LCS Setting Operation Mode LCS Setting Recording Mode LCS Setting LCS Password CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key 290 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration DPT 1 9 Answering Feature
248. gno Ans Wei aaa n e A a a a aandtega gale e E R 338 43 57 Paging Demy ocenie an ea r AA ee A N 340 4 3 58 Paging and TEANSTer nen n eligi tid tad Be eS a een Taa 342 4 3 59 Paralleled Telephone Connection sseseeeseeseseessesessresestrsrssrestrrtssestssrestestsseeeresre 345 Ce 60 MARE sd DIN O1 I EEEE EE E TE EATEN 347 4 3 61 Phantom Extension i 23f12 Joris ets ead aE a E ESES 350 4 3 62 Pickup Dialing Hot Line netecie ietimi kei o ea E e E eE 355 4363 Priyacy Release a an iis Washoe cit ea ia Ai ad AA 357 4 3 64 Pulseto Tone Conversion eresie ii ectiecesdecenesseuesthasleecaeubaocPiabencosacespnebaccavepaanecubbanes 359 43 65 Quick Draing na i et at See ae eae 360 43 60 Redial a toenemende Reet eter ata lias Bane AES cies Cat Me ce net ea 361 43 617 Released Dink Operation 6 3 1 c secedtesseedecteeececag and its a eia a Ea 364 43 68 Ringing Transfet onie i ae eee ties eval ed eae ee eee 366 4 3 69 Secret B sy Oyerrid nioena resting een i estan ris r ie a a ei aea Ti 368 4 3 70 Secret Dialing cn ces ctesee seca a E late Os 370 4 3 71 Station Program Clear s crude teeth i eh es eae el dee ei ees 372 43 72 Station Speed DIA Srnice iena Gated tee ee thes aeons tis 374 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing essenin ntete aeee atari ia REEERE EEES 376 4 3 74 Timed Reminder Wake Up Call ssnseesssessssssessssssssssssssssesssesssesssesssrsstesssesseesseesee 378 4 313 Toll Restriction Overntide cca eis due ine dai eah Eo
249. gramming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 507 DSS Console Features 5 2 3 Answer Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an Answer button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone DSS PF AUTO DIAL GE or D fo STORE Press the desired Dial 94 Press STORE DSS or PF button lt PT Display Example gt Answer The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e For the KX T7441 the ANSWER button is provided as a fixed feature button 508 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 4 Conference CONF Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a Conference CONF button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL DSS PF a a RE o 6E STORE Press the desired Dial 70 Press STORE DSS or PF button lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming Conference mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 509 DSS Console Features 5 2
250. gt as many outside calls as the number of CO S CO G CO L CO buttons and DN buttons on it lt SLT gt One Not available An SLT user can hold only one call either an intercom or outside at a time To hold multiple calls use the Call Park feature Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized retrieving a held call intercom or outside is only available within the same tenant Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the held call when it is retrieved by dialing the feature number This tone can be eliminated by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve gt The extension user cannot retrieve the following calls Unattended Conference Calls Calls held at the System Call Parking Area Calls placed on Exclusive Call Hold Programming Guide References 192 2 2 Tenant Music on Hold Source 2 3 Numbering Plan Hold Hold Retrieve Station Hold Retrieve Trunk Call Waiting Set Cancel 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time 2 8 System Option User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Music on Hold 1 10 Holding Features e
251. he Alert button can be used to confirm the not responded room number and to call back the room To confirm the extension which did not answer the timed reminder alert Display PT Alert Unanswered CLR a b extension number lt EEEE is displayed co Press Alert Press CLR to clear To call the unanswered extension Alert O gt Lift the handset or press Press Alert SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions System Time The system clock must be set before the alarm is set e If an alarm time has not been set when you confirm the setting the display shows the following Alarm Not Stored e Timed Reminder message can be recorded by the Manager or an Operator Outgoing Message OGM When the alarm is heard you can hear the message by going off hook if it has been recorded You hear an intermittent tone dial tone 3 instead of the message in the following cases a A DISA Card is not equipped b All DISA ports are busy or OUS Out of Service c The Timed Reminder message has not been stored 380 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT If other extension user calls your extension when the alarm is sounding he will hear a busy tone However if your PT is DN type and there is an idle PDN button the call comes in on that PDN button In this case the caller hears a ringback tone If you receive an incoming CO call during the alarm the ringing starts after the
252. he bottom line on the display as follows CONT EFA ACCNT User Manual 465 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Confirming and calling back When the SHIFT indicator is red there are calls logged KX T7433 KX T7230 Second Display To return to SHIFT WED JANO1 03 00P SHIFT the initial OLD7 NEWS display Once KX T7230 qin CA Twice KX T7433 To see the confirmed To see the unconfirmed information information Sequence number 01 011111111 To modify the phone number 01 30 and caller s press X to erase and 0 through number is displayed ee 9 to add numbers from the first digit N Pressing the INFO S1 button To see the provides you with further other caller s information information once sequence number 01 30 caller s name twice date time number of times called 30 times max three times outside line number outside line name To call back go off hook gt 05 0011223344 CALL fi i oc 466 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Operating sequence Notes 1 Press the SHIFT button e To delete the displayed number press the CLR 2 Press the OLD S1 or NEW S2 button to see S2 button the confirmed or unconfirmed information e The PREV S3 and EXIT S1 button appear Je Presi the NEXT S3 or PREV S3 bition to _ OY Pesing the SHIFT button while wis f confirming
253. he latter party first and the SLT user is connected with the previous party first SLT If Released Link Operation is enabled on your extension by System Programming you cannot establish a conference call Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Released Link Operation 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override 1 10 Holding Features e Call Splitting 1 12 Conversation Features 226 e Conference 3 Party e Conference 5 Party e Conference Unattended e Privacy Release User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 23 Conference Unattended e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 4 3 63 Privacy Release User Manual 227 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 22 Conference 5 Party A PT user can originate a 5 party conference call which includes outside or inside parties or both in any combination To establish a 5 party conference Celeb fy Lift the handset or press Dial 52x SP PHONE MONITOR Dial tone lt PT Display Example gt Conference Start The CONF indicator light begins to flash slowly in red
254. hone number or feature number up to 24 digits in a One Touch Dialing button Dialing CO One Touch Lift the handset or press Press CO if required Press One Touch Dialing SP PHONE MONITOR Flexible button Conditions e PT One Touch Dialing button can be programmed by Station User or System Programming e PT If you store the telephone number of an outside party a CO line access code 9 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit eae You may press a CO button to select a desired CO line directly before pressing the One Touch Dialing button PT Combination dialing Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in a combination e PT Storing more than 25 digits It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One Touch Dialing buttons In this case a CO line access code 9 801 through 848 should be stored in the first button e PT Full One Touch Dialing If Full One Touch Dialing is enabled press the One Touch Dialing button directly without going off hook e Any feature number can be stored in a One Touch Dialing button However the feature numbers for Speed Dialing Station and Speed Dialing Station Programming do not function User Manual 323 Station Features and Operation PT SLT P
255. ice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 86 User Manual Station Programming 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment Allows you to assign a delayed ringing function on the PDN SDN button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 Press PDN or SDN Dial 76 you wish to assign the delayed ringing function lt PT Display Example gt Immediate Ring lt PT Display Example gt 1 ring Delay AUTO DIAL delayed ringing type no STORE Enter the delayed ringing type Press STORE number 0 through 4 0 Immediate Ring 1 1 ring Delay 2 3 ring Delay 3 6 ring Delay 4 No Ring The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode e If you want to change the delayed ringing type enter another type number again To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e If more than one PDN button is assigned on a PT Delayed Ringing can be set to the first PDN button assigned to the CO 01 only This Delayed Ringing setting applies to all PDN buttons on the same PT User Manual 87 Station Programming 2 2 10 Phantom Button Ringing On Off Assignment Allows you to assign a ringing On Off function on a Phantom button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9
256. ietary Telephones DPTs are available to utilize various features of the KX TD500 System in addition to supporting basic telephone services making or receiving calls There are the following nine DPT models KX T7400 Series KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Displ Tilt up Tilt up ee 16 char line ue ae None None 16 char line 24 char line 1 line LCD 3 line LCD 6 line LCD Soft Buttons 3 Soft Buttons and None None None 3 Soft Buttons 10 Function Function Buttons Buttons Jog Dial Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes CO Buttons 12 24 12 24 24 Fixed Feature Please refer to Fixed Buttons in Section 1 1 4 Feature Buttons Buttons KX T7200 Series KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Displ Tilt up REAY 16 char line ARR None 24 char line None 2 line LCD i 6 line LCD Soft Buttons 3 Soft Buttons and None 3 Soft Buttons 10 Function None Function Buttons Buttons Speakerphone Yes Yes Yes Monitor only CO Buttons 24 24 12 6 Fixed Feature Buttons Please refer to Fixed Buttons in Section 1 1 4 Feature Buttons 20 User Manual DPT Overview 1 1 2 Location of Controls KX T7420 Flexible CO Buttons PROGRAM Button Outside lines 01 through 12 FWD DND Button Raso CONF Button Q SS Sf INTERCOM Button a JES ASS J lt ANV SS Yj DV x fA PAUSE Button Z 7 TRANSFER Button ce Y Used to adjust
257. if the FDN for Operator Group is set as the destination of Extension Group in other tenants calls will arrive at the destination of Extension Group e An operator seeking incoming call to the PDN of owner extension does not appear on the SDN button e Acall toa single operator hunts for an idle extension as follows lt For Extension Group members gt in numerical order of the extension port physical numbers starting at the extension following the last one called lt For Incoming Group members gt in the order assigned in the Incoming Group It is programmable whether to start at the extension following the last one called or to always start at the first assigned extension by System Programming lt Section 3 5 Incoming Group Search Mode in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No e 2 2 Tenant Operator FDN User Manual 325 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 2 3 Numbering Plan Operator Call e 3 3 Extension Group FDN Group Type Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Operator Setting Ringing Type Operator Setting Call Priority e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Group Type Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Operator Setting Ringing Type Operator Setting Call Priority e 4 2 Trunk Line Trunk Line Destination
258. ine will be disconnected Switching from hands free to the handset mode 2 N Lift the handset User Manual 277 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions PE The hands free mode is canceled if you do not start dialing within 10 seconds PT The KX T7050 KX T7350 and the KX T7250 have a MONITOR button instead of a SP PHONE button It can be used for hands free dialing etc but not for a hands free conversation PT You can execute hands free mode by pressing a CO or INTERCOM or DN button without going off hook PT When Full One Touch Dialing is enabled pressing a One Touch Dialing DSS REDIAL or SAVE button provides the hands free mode Helpful hints Use this unit in a quiet room for best performance If the other party has difficulty hearing you decrease the volume If you and the other party speak at the same time parts of your conversation will be lost To avoid this speak alternately Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 6 1 1 Originating Features e Full One Touch Dialing 2 Conversation Features e Hands free Operation User Manual References 278 4 3 38 Full One Touch Dialing User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 42 Inter Office Calling You can make a call to another extension user within the system or a tenant Using the handse
259. ines the features that can be assigned to the Flexible Buttons Button CO PT DSS DSS PF PT Features to be assigned pe Single CO W Group CO Loop CO DSS Direct Station Selection Phantom PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number ONE TOUCH One Touch Dialing MESSAGE Owner Extension FILIS S ISISI ISIS MESSAGE OTHER Another Phantom Extension FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Group FWD SAVE Saved Number Redial ACCOUNT Account Code Entry CONF Conference KLISISIS VTR Voice Mail Transfer Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out KIRSIAIA IRATI SS 2WAY REC Two Way Record 34 User Manual DPT Overview Button CO PT DSS DSS PF PT Features to be assigned So 2WAY TRAN Two Way Transfer Vv Vv LCS Live Call Screening Vv Vv LCS Live Call Screening Cancel Vv Vv DAY NIGHT Day Night Switch Vv Vv Alarm Vv Answer Vv Vv Vv Release Y Y Y Tone Through Vv Vv Alert Vv x Available for monitoring the call activity only 2 Can only be assigned by User or System Programming 3 Can only be assigned by System Programming Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary
260. ing e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 339 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 57 Paging Deny Allows you to deny receiving paging announcement through the built in speakers of your PTs Setting ly e C pd P GPE amp Lift the handset or press Dial 7211 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Paging Deny On Canceling h C pS P GET gb Lift the handset or press Dial 7210 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Paging Deny Off Conditions e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan 340 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Paging Deny Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1 14 Paging Featu
261. ion PT SLT 4 4 10 Switching COS You can assign either primary or secondary level of COS Class of Service for each extension Setting 7235 7436 Long c Features Be A Cc Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT until the following is displayed y EN Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Feature Access is COS Primary or displayed COS Second is displayed y Gad Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE 436 COS Primary ext COS Secondary ext Press COS Primary or COS Secondary COS Primary ext SELECT MODE Press SELECT DSS extension no or D Dial the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button DSS extension no or O Dial the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Press SHIFT Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until until FEAT is COS Primary or displayed COS Second is at the arrow 7 DSS inp eje fy Dial the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits or Confirmation tone press DSS flexible button and dial tone PT and SLT PON 7 o 2 Primary L 3 Secondary gt COS Primary ext COS Second ext MENU SEL n gt n aa o Press SEL Ghd Hang up or press SP PHONE or
262. ion whether DND is set by the extension user or not Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Remote DND Control Features Guide Reference 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Feature Control 1 8 Ringing Features Do Not Disturb DND User Manual References e 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND User Manual 429 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 8 Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once The Manager and the Operators can ring an extension that has set Call Forwarding Canceling FWD temporarily 7235 7436 D NEXT c FWD Cancel Once gt ext Cc Features a Cc Lift the handset or Press Features Rotate Jog Dial or press Press FWD Cancel Once press SP PHONE NEXT until the following is displayed destination extension no Ringback tone DSS Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button e Ringing starts at the destination extension 430 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling FWD temporarily FWD Cancel Once SELECT MODE a CO Lift the handset or Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT press SP PHONE Feature Access is FWD Cancel Once displayed is displayed destination extension no Ringback tone Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button e Ringing starts at the destination extension User Manual
263. ion number CLR To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You cannot enter non existent extension or a floating directory number Please refer to Floating Station of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide Programming Guide References e 3 3 Extension Group FDN Group Type e 5 10 VPS Integration A Floating Directory Number FDN is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension User Manual 81 82 Station Programming 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment Allows you to enable or disable the Full One Touch Dialing function The Hands free Operation mode is activated by pressing a One Touch Dialing button DSS button REDIAL button or SAVE button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL 1 Jel m STORE Dial 1 or 2 Press STORE 1 to select the off mode 2 to select the on mode The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode e The STORE indicator light turns off lt PT Display Example gt Hands free Off When disabled To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is On User Manual Statio
264. ion that a message notification has been received e Paralleled Telephone Connection allows you to connect your DPT in parallel with an SLT Each telephone can have the same extension number so that you can use either telephone If the eXtra Device Port XDP feature is available through System Programming each telephone can be connected to the same extension port but have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions e System Feature Access Menu allows you to access various features easily by following the display on the large LCD and pressing corresponding buttons e VPS Integration Option enables forwarding any incoming call to Voice Mail Recording or Playing back the message s is also available To use Voice Mail services installing a Voice Processing System VPS is required Terms used in the Descriptions Feature Numbers A feature number is an access code for various functions when programming or executing features using proprietary or single line telephones connected to the system You can access available features by dialing the corresponding feature number and additional number if required There are two types of feature numbers as follows e Flexible feature number e Fixed feature number While fixed feature numbers cannot be changed flexible feature numbers can be changed Please refer to the Programming Guide for details In this manual the default numbers are used to describe
265. itching Day Night Mode Account Code Mode SDN COS Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Released Link Operation Automatic Hold e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Walking COS e 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting TRS Level Day Night Time Limit of Outside Calls Transfer to CO Busy Override Busy Override Deny DND Override Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode Switching Day Night mode Account Code Mode SDN COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Released Link Operation Automatic Hold e 4 3 Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary e 10 6 System Parameters Password Walking COS Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Class of Service COS 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction e Walking COS 402 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 403 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 85 Walking Station Used to move an extension to a new location without re programming Extension data such as extension number One Touch dialing memory remain the same after the
266. ivacy Release in the Programming Guide gt 3 party call 2 party call During a 3 party conference call with an outside party and inside party you can terminate either one of two parties and talk to the other Trunk Route Control When the outside call made using a specific trunk is busy on another call the Manager or the Operators can join the existing outside call by dialing 2 after hearing a busy tone User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Barge in PT This feature is available between two extensions who share the same S CO button e PT DN This feature is available when one extension has an SDN button associated with the PDN button of the other extensions e The pre assigned extension users can interrupt an existing outside call even if access to that line is not allowed by System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Data Line Security Set Cancel Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel Trunk Route Control e 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Busy Override Deny e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Trunk Route Control 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party e Conference 5 Party Use
267. ive a doorphone call E1234 amp 10101 P1234 amp 10101 Conference with an extension and CO line E1234 amp E2345 P1234 amp P2345 Conference with two extensions Enter ACCNT Code ENTRER NO COMPTE Pressing Account Button Account Code Entry Ext Data Clear DONN PST ANNUL Execute Station Program Clear External BGM Off MUS EXT NON Stop BGM through external pager Background Music BGM External External BGM On MUS EXT OUI Start BGM through external pager Background Music BGM External Extrnl Page All RECH EXT TOUS Access to Paging External to all external pager 540 User Manual Appendix English Display French Display Description Extrnl Page 1 RECH EXT 1 Access to Paging External to a specific external pager FWD ALL Ext1234 RNV TOUS PST1234 Complete to set Call Forwarding All Calls Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button FWD B NA Ext1000 RNV O SR PST1000 Complete to set Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button FWD BSY Ext2345 RNV OCC PST2345 Complete to set Call Forwarding Busy Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button FWD CO 91201431 RNV LR 91201431 Complete to set Call Forwarding to Outside Line Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button FWD
268. k Regarding the PT with the Group FWD button if Incoming Group FWD feature is assigned to the PT extension the Group FWD indicator lights in red 187 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e While setting you can temporarily cancel this feature by pressing the Group FWD button Pressing the Group FWD button alternates between setting and canceling the mode Eo OFF 7 The lighting patterns of the Group FWD button are as follows Off This feature is not set Red on Group FWD mode e The Group FWD button cannot be used to store or cancel this feature Please use the feature number for Group FWD instead Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Group FWD e 2 4 Class of Service COS Incoming Group FWD e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 188 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 11 Call Hold You can place a call intercom or outside on hold Call Hold While the call is on hold you can make or receive other calls The held call can be retriev
269. k depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Pickup Dialing Program Set Cancel e 2 5 System Timer Pickup Dial Waiting Time e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line PF key Pickup Dialing Mode Pickup Dialing Dial Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Automatic Station Release e Pickup Dialing Hot Line User Manual References e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 356 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 63 Privacy Release Allows you to establish a three party conference call while connected to an existing call Setting During a conversation with an outside party to allow another extension to join the conversation at your extension CO Press the corresponding co e The corresponding CO indicator light flashes green rapidly To leave the conference y Eba Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR e The other two parties may continue their conversation at the other extension h co M D Press the flashing CO Confirmation tone
270. l of the characters will appear in the following order AaBb Zz space lt gt amp AaBb Conditions The default is Not Stored e Upto 10 dialing numbers and names can be assigned Each dialing number has a maximum of 24 digits and each name has a maximum of 10 characters e The number can be an extension number telephone number or a feature number e To store the telephone number of an outside party a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit e You can use 0 through 9 x PAUSE FLASH CONF and INTERCOM for storing FLASH hook flash PAUSE pause CONF hyphen INTERCOM for secret dialing User Manual 105 Station Programming 106 User Manual User Programming Section 3 User Programming User Manual 107 User Programming 3 1 3 1 1 108 User Programming Instructions General Programming Instructions User Programming allows you any PT extension user who knows the User Programming Password to program the following system features from your telephone individually e 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set e 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set e 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 3 2 6 006 Caller ID Dial Set e 3 2 7 007 Caller ID Name Set e 3 2 8 008 Absent Messages Set e 3 2 9 009 Quick Dial Number Set e 3 2 10 010 DISA TI
271. lash the switchhook TRANSFER iig A For PT For SLT Confirmation tone and dial tone e The other party is placed on hold User Manual Ebd Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR floating directory no Dial the floating directory number 3 or 4 digits for Remote Resource The call is transferred 205 Station Features and Operation PT SLT One Touch Transfer During a conversation with an external party DSS Press DSS flexible button The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is called immediately Transferring a call to an external party via a CO or TIE line Screened PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER For PT I For SLT PA For PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation For SLT Flash the switchhook tone and dial tone ne l The current call is placed on hold co Ringback tone Wait for an answer 206 line access code Press CO or enter a line access code 9 or 77 or 801 through 848 2 di Announce Dial the phone number where calls will be transferred Eba Hang up or press SP PHONE The call is transferred User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Transferring a call to an external party via a CO or TIE line Unscreened PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER y FA For PT OW Ny es ys For SLT line
272. le 209 Station Features and Operation PT SLT DSS Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Limited Call Duration e Music on Hold e Released Link Operation 1 10 Holding Features e Automatic Hold For Hold 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Transfer e One Touch Transfer 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Hold Recall 3 1 TIE Line Features e TIE Line Service User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 5 2 6 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Assignment 210 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 17 Call Waiting During a call a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is another call waiting for you You can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold PT users can choose one of three Call Waiting modes Setting Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR g Gba Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Loy ON Lift the handset User Manual 1 Call Waiting BSS 1 Dial 7311 2 Dial 7312 3 Dial 7313 lt PT Display Example gt 1 C Waiting BSS C Waiting OHCA C Waiting W OHCA 7 Ls 4 4 J Dial 7311 Ls lilli 2 Call Waiting OHCA 3 1 2 3 Call Waiting W OHCA 3 1 Le T h Confirmation tone and dial tone h Confirmation tone and dial tone 211
273. lexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 9 Call Forwarding e 4 3 82 Voice Mail Transfer 400 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 84 Walking COS All ows you to make a toll call at other lower level COS extensions toll outward restricted by employing your own higher level COS temporarily Making a call PT and SLT At another extension oy ro Lift the hand or press SP PHONE Q set Dial 47 Enter the Walking COS Dial your extension Confirmation password 4 through 7 number tone and MONITOR digits 3 or 4 digits dial tone lt PT Display Example gt Set COS of Exxxx your extension number phone no cbs Dial the phone Hang up or press number SP PHONE MONITOR e You must dial a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 The COS level of the extension or press the CO button returns to the original level Conditions User Manual Class of Service COS programming is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions A COS level 1 96 is assigned to each extension by System Programming Walking COS applies to the following COS items Trunk Group Setting Day Night TRS Toll Restriction Level Day Night Time Limit of Outside Calls Transfer to CO Busy Override Busy Override Deny DND Override Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode 401 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Sw
274. light turns green Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR You may press a Loop CO button directly without first going off hook User Manual 327 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Trunk Access Direct h pI a 5 9 A bs Lift the handset Press CO Dialtone Dial the phone number Talk Hang up or press or press SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR e The CO indicator light turns green e The display shows the phone number e You may press a CO button S CO G CO or L CO button directly without first going off hook Trunk Access Individual Trunk Ij 2 Zo 23 tY i ols Lift the handset Press CO assigned as Dialtone Dial the phone number Talk Hang up or press or press Single CO SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR The CO indicator light turns green The display shows the phone number e You may press an S CO button directory without first going off hook 328 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Trunk Access Trunk Group PT and SLT CO For PT h S ne 3 E S rosin Y chs Lift the handset For PT Press CO assigned Dialtone Dial the Talk Hang up or press or press as Group CO phone number SP PHONE SP PHONE MONITOR For SLT PT Dial 8 and the trunk MONITOR group number 01 through 48 e The display shows the phone number The selected CO indicator light turns green e You may press a G CO button directory withou
275. line the dialed number will be sent to the Central Office immediately before the inter digit time expires by dialing after the telephone number 152 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Automatic Route Selection e 2 3 Numbering Plan Local CO Line Access ARS Trunk Group Access e 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting e 2 6 Local Hunt Sequence e 3 2 Trunk Group Line Hunting Order e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Preferred Line Outgoing Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Trunk Group 1 6 Originating Features e Automatic Route Selection ARS e Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line e Trunk Access e Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 2 2 12 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 41 Hands free Operation e 4 3 42 Inter Office Calling e 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access e 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory e 45 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory User Manual 153 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 2 2 Receiving Calls PT and SLT Gy CO INTERCOM DN ae CL o CL o Od Lift the handset or press SP PHONE Press a rapid flashing CO or INTERCOM or DN The CO or INTERC
276. ling Ring Voice feature A hands free conversation mode is established as soon as a confirmation tone is sent e PT This feature does not work for the following calls CO calls Doorphone calls Calls to an Extension Group User Manual 275 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Calls to an Incoming Group Calls to a Phantom button Calls from a VM Voice Mail extension except a call from a PT Calls ringing on an SDN button EPP This feature is not available if your PT has no AUTO ANSWER MUTE button e Itis programmable whether or not to answer the intercom call on Consultation Hold automatically by System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Auto Answer with held call Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 9 Answering Features e Hands free Answerback User Manual References None 276 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 41 Hands free Operation You can make an intercom CO call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset Setting SP PHONE Press SP PHONE The microphone and speaker are now activated and the hands free operation is available Switching from the handset to hands free mode SP PHONE 5 Eba Press SP PHONE Hang up Do not replace the handset without pressing the SP PHONE button first or the l
277. ll CO DN Oo or OAA Lift the handset or Press CO or DN button which press SP PHONE is flashing rapidly User Manual 231 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions e Class of Service An Unattended Conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party by COS programming e Limited Call Duration The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer Hold Recall tone Hold Recall tone is sent to the extension user who left the conference 50 seconds before the time out Hold Alarm tone An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties three times at 5 second interval 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension who originated the Unattended Conference returns to the call e PT If your extension is engaged in a call when Unattended Conference Recall occurs the display flashes 10101 amp 20211 for example for 5 seconds at 15 seconds intervals This is available when Call Waiting feature is enabled on your extension beforehand e CONF Conference button If a CONF button is not provided on a PT it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming Programming Guide Reference e 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting Transfer to CO e 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key
278. ll is answered after a ringback tone is returned to the caller after the DISA Delayed Answer Time expires The caller can dial while hearing the OGM message DISA User Code The KX TD500 System can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS level for each Each code should be unique DISA User Code Entry Failure If the DISA caller fails to enter the valid DISA user code three times consecutively the call will be disconnected DISA built in Automated Attendant Table This system can store up to eight DISA built in auto attendant number tables and each table includes 10 one digit numbers DISA built in Automated Attendant Number The DISA built in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other numbers extension number Floating Number etc To avoid confusion the system waits for the second digit for a pre programmed amount of time default 1 second If the second digit is not dialed until the timer expires the system assumes that the first digit is a DISA built in auto attendant number Call Forwarding to CO or TIE Line When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party the caller is not required to enter a DISA user code regardless of the Security modes CO to CO line call duration The duration of CO to CO line calls can be limited by System Programming When the specified time expires default 10 min both lines are disconnected unless the caller re tries or extends the duration time if available A
279. llers When you are engaged in the 2nd call inside while placing the 1st call inside on exclusive hold ICM CO type PT only Between two extensions HOLD Pressing the HOLD button alternates between two callers Press HOLD Consultation Hold places a call on hold temporarily to transfer it or makes a Conference call or Call Splitting 202 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT When you are engaged in the 2nd call inside outside while placing the 1st call inside outside on exclusive hold CO INTERCOM DN OJ or CJ or CO Repeating these operations steps 1 and 2 Press HOLD Press CO or INTERCOM or DN alternates between two callers Conditions e This feature does not work during a doorphone call or paging Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Call Splitting e Consultation Hold 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party User Manual References e 43 11 Call Hold User Manual 203 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 16 Call Transfer You can transfer a call intercom CO TIE to another extension or external party The following types are available to CO TIE Line voice announcement Feature Type Transferring Method Screened to Extension Transfers a call to the extension or the external party after a to CO TIE Line voice
280. lock an extension you can select to lock outside calls or intercom calls Programming PROGRAM I e O O ee e Press PROGRAM Dial 99 Dial 01 Dial the extension number 3 or 4 digits or X extension number to set one extension x to set all extensions e You enter into the Station Programming mode lt PT Display Example gt PT PGM Mode AUTO DIAL PROGRAM er ata STORE lt PT Display Example gt EXT NO Dial 1 or 2 or 3 1 to unlock 2 to lock outside calls 3 to lock intercom calls except operator calls Press STORE Press PROGRAM to exit the Station Programming mode lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights 1234 CO Lock Conditions e This feature supersedes the Electronic Station Lockout feature If Electronic Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and this feature is set the extension user cannot cancel the lock Only the Manager and the Operators can cancel the lock e Operator Call is always available from any extension whether it is locked or not Programming Guide References System Programming is not required 434 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Electronic Station Lockout User Manual References e 4 3 30 Electronic Station Lockout User Manual 435 Station Features and Operat
281. me expires the phone will ring Hold Alarm Tone If the extension user is engaged in a call when the Hold Recall Time expires an alarm tone is sent from the built in speaker of a PT or from the handset receiver of an SLT at 15 second intervals In this case Call Waiting feature should be set at the extension beforehand For further information on Tone Patterns please refer to Section 6 1 3 Tone List e Placing a call on Exclusive Call Hold is not available for an SLT user e Exclusive Call Hold Regular Call Hold e After Hold Recall or Hold Alarm Tone is emitted the held call can be retrieved from any extension even if it is placed on Exclusive Call Hold User Manual 191 Station Features and Operation PT SLT It is possible to disable the Hold Recall tone by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt Automatic Disconnection If an inside outside call put on hold is not retrieved within 30 minutes it is disconnected automatically The number of calls that can be placed on exclusive hold at an extension It differs depending on the telephone type as follows Intercom calls lt ICM type PT gt One lt SLT gt One Not available lt DN type PT gt as many intercom calls as the number of DN PDN SDN buttons on it Outside calls lt ICM type PT gt as many outside calls as the number of CO S CO G CO L CO buttons on it lt DN type PT
282. mming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation 200 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line Call Pickup Deny Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Call Pickup User Manual References e 4 3 13 Call Pickup e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 201 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 15 Call Splitting Allows you to have two callers on a line and alternate between them If a call comes in while you are already on the line you can place the current call 1st call on hold and have a conversation with the other party 2nd call When you are engaged in the 2nd call inside outside while placing the 1st call inside outside on hold temporarily Consultation Hold TRANSFER You are connected to the Ist caller Pressing the TRANSFER button alternates Press TRANSFER between two callers yY You are connected to the 1st caller Flashing the switchhook alternates between two lea Flash the switchhook ca
283. n PT SLT System Speed Dialing Notes 1 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at You can press the Function button F1 through the arrow F10 on the same line of the desired item instead of the CALL S3 button For System Speed Dialing and Extension Dialing before rotating the Jog Dial you can 2 Press the CALL S3 button or go off hook Station Speed Dialing Extension Dialing press the corresponding alphabet key to select 1 Press the STA S1 or EXT S2 button the desired letter l aad f lt Example gt Press 2 twice to display B items 2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow 3 Press the CALL S3 button or go off hook User Manual 495 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu You can access the features which are displayed in alphabetical order To access the features you may shift the display to the Jog Dial Operation display by pressing the MODE or SHIFT button first Then follow the procedures below To access the features while receiving a call e g ringing press the INTERCOM DN button first Then follow the procedures below KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Third Display Third Display WED JANO1 03 00P WED JANO1 03 00P STA EXT Extension STA Speed 1 f 1 f 1 Features SYS Speed BSY Ovr DNY 1 0 ABST MSG Off Absent MSG Off Taal CO ABST MSG On 1
284. n Programming 52 User Manual Station Programming Confirming the assigned data on the Flexible button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 a Press the desired Flexible Press HOLD END CO DSS PF button The display shows the current status The display shows the initial programming mode To exit Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM If you wish to change the data follow the programming procedure explained in this section Clearing the data on the Flexible button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL oc 2 Press the desired Flexible Press STORE CO DSS PF button that you wish to cancel the assignment STORE The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM The following lists are the buttons and programming access numbers used for Station Programming Detailed operating instructions are explained on each page in this section User Manual 53 Station Programming Station Programming Outline Flexible Button Assignment Station Programming 1 Direct Station Selection DSS Button 2 One Touch Dialing Button Eg Message Waiting MESSAGE Button 4 FWD DND Button 5 6 PROGRAM H 9 H9 SAVE Button Account Button
285. n Programming 2 2 5 Handset Headset Selection Allows you to select the handset mode or headset mode Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Dial 9 Dial 1 or 2 Press STORE 1 to select Handset mode 2 to select Headset mode STORE The display shows the The STORE indicator lights current status The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is Handset User Manual 83 Station Programming 2 2 6 Initial Display Selection Allows you to select the initial display Caller ID CO line name or DID name which is shown on the display when a call is received Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Dial 81 Dial 1 2 or 3 Press STORE STORE 1 for the Caller ID 2 for the CO line name 3 for the DID name e The display shows the e The STORE indicator lights current display type e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e The default is Caller ID mode 84 User Manual Station Programming 2 2 7 Intercom Alert Assignment Allows you to select the alert mode tone voice when receiving an intercom extension call Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9
286. n incoming call from a doorphone DND does not work for the following calls Hold Recall Timed Reminder Alarm Tone Calls directed by Intercept Routing Do Not Disturb Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service PT An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If one of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature is assigned another does not function but the assignment itself is preserved for future use The extension user can choose either one by pressing the FWD DND button while on hook In this case pressing the button changes the settings as follows Ba gt FWD RON The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows Off Both functions are canceled Redon DND mode This setting can be changed Red flash FWD mode by System Programming 245 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT PT FWD DND button Regarding the PT 7050 7055 7250 without the FWD DND button it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming e PT A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing a flashing button which shows the arrival of the call e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinc
287. n no of the owner extension Press the desired Flexible Dial 75 Enter the extension number Press STORE CO button you wish to 3 or 4 digits of the owner assign as an SDN button extension STORE lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial SDN programming mode CLR lt PT Display Example gt SDN XXXX CLR xxxx extension number To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e An SDN button should have its associated PDN button of another extension This assignment is available for extensions on which at least one PDN button is already assigned DN type PT Otherwise the SDN button dose not function e Up to three different SDN buttons can be assigned to a PT e Upto eight SDN buttons per PDN button can be assigned to eight different PTs respectively 76 User Manual Station Programming Single CO S CO Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Single CO button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL o trunk port physical number STORE Press the desired Flexible Dial 0 Enter the trunk port physical Press STORE CO DSS but
288. nal BGM Off Installation Manual References e 2 8 1 External Pager Paging Equipment e 2 8 2 External Music Source Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant BGM Source e 2 3 Numbering Plan External BGM On Off e 4 6 External Paging BGM BGM Source Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Background Music BGM External 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Background Music BGM User Manual References None 410 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock The Manager and the Operators can cancel the Call Log Incoming Log Lock feature set at any other extension Programming AUTO DIAL PROGRAM extension no or e ee ee Ee e2 Lx Press PROGRAM Dial 99 Dial 02 Dial the extension number Press STORE 3 or 4 digits or X extension number to clear one extension to clear all extensions STORE e You are in the Station Programming mode sel Loe Demi The STORE indicator lights PT PGM Mode PROGRAM lt PT Display Example gt EXT NO Press PROGRAM to exit the Station Programming mode lt PT Display Example gt 1234 Unlock Conditions e Ifthe extension user forgets his pre set password he can ask the Manager or an Operator to clear the password User Manual References e 4 5 5 Call Log Incoming Log Lock KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235
289. nce e Remote Station Lock e Data Line Security Timed Reminder e DIL 1 N Service e Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Do Not Disturb DND e Voice Mail Service e Executive Busy Override Operation Step Box In this section operations for extension users are described using the following Operation Step Box K Applicable telephone Applicable telephone Both PT and SLT users i i KX T7230 KX T7235 can follow the operation KX T7 433 and KX steps below T7436 users can execute A a 7 ory aassssssannarernrnrererreereereeers NOT Only the button operation but also the display operation below PT and SLT 2 Wait for an answer Wait for an answer b Operation steps and talk Dial 2 Press BSS S1 User Manual 149 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Notes e If your telephone is not noted in the operating step box ex only PT is noted this means your telephone does not have the ability to execute that feature e If your telephone has the ability to perform several operations for one feature you can select the method according to your needs e In this manual the default feature numbers are used to describe each operation and illustration Use the new programmed numbers if default feature numbers are changed by System Programming e For Proprietary Telephone operations all button illustrations are based on the model KX T7235 Description of Symbols Used In this sec
290. nd Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References 242 1 7 DISA Port Assignment 2 3 Numbering Plan OGM Playback Record 2 4 Class of Service COS TRS Level Day Night 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time DISA Prolong Time DISA Automated Attendant Time DISA IRNA Time Intercept Timer after OGM 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction 2 8 System Option DISA prolong operation Dialing in DISA CO to CO talking Destination Busy DISA Illegal Number DISA 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night Cyclic Signal Detection Continuous Signal Detection Silence Detection 3 6 OGM Group FDN Tenant No OGM Type Security Mode DISA built in Automated Attendant Tables Dial 0 Dial 9 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break CPC Signal OUT Detection CPC Signal OUT Detection Detection Time CPC Signal IN Detection CPC Signal IN Detection Detection Time 5 9 DISA TIE User Code Code COS User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM 1 5 Attended Features e Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 11 Transferring Features e Intercept Routing User Manual References e 3 2 10 010 DISA TIE User Code Set e 44 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback User Manu
291. nd the destination extension is called immediately Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Pressing DSS key operation in CO talking User Manual 533 DSS Console Features 5 2 26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation The DSS Console for Attendant KX T7441 is provided with the ANSWER button and the RELEASE button which are useful for operators who use headsets For other DSS Consoles ANSWER button and RELEASE button can be assigned to a DSS or PF button With the ANSWER button you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone With the RELEASE button you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete a Call Transfer DSS Console When a call comes in on your extension ANSWER E az Press ANSWER Talk Call Transfer PT and DSS Console During a conversation fp Paired telephone v s TRANSFER Confirmation tone and dial tone Press TRANSFER 534 RELEASE The call is disconnected e You hear no tone Press RELEASE DSS Console DSS Press the desired DSS button DSS Console L9 RELEASE 7 Press RELEASE e The destination is confirmed before transferring the call This step can be skipped User Manual DSS Console Features One Touch Transfer PT and DSS Console During a conversation with the headset or handset RELEASE DSS C Press the desired DSS button Press RELEASE The o
292. ne Hang up or press SP PHONE 000 through 999 twice and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt Log Locked XXX L Lock code Unlocking 7230 7235 7433 7436 fo ee a R Cz Dds Lift the handset or press Dial 57 Enter the same lock code Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE you used to lock the extension and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt Unlocked Conditions e This feature is available for KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 only e Call Log Lock Control Incoming The Manager or an Operator can unlock the call log display for any extension if you forget your lock code e With the KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan User Manual 471 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 4 2 Trunk Line Name e 4 3 Extension Line Initial Display Selection Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Lock Password Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service 1 17 Display Features e Call Log Incoming User Manual References e 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System F
293. nected and can start a conversation Using Paging External to a particular external pager PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER al For PT l For SLT external pager no FA al For PT Press TRANSFER Dial tone Dial 32 Dial external pager number Confirmation tone For SLT Flash the switchhook 1 or 2 optional The other party is placed on consultation hold S amp alsa Announce Wait for an answer Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR optional e The held party and paged extension are connected and can start a conversation User Manual 343 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Using Paging Group to all paging groups 01 16 PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER C7 ForPT y For SLT pr FA a For PT Press Dial 33 TRANSFER For SLT Flash the switchhook Dial tone e The other party is placed on consultation hold 7 7 qe we v p 9 2 N Ww wy cba Wait for Confirmation Hang up or an answer tone optional press SP PHONE Confirmation Announce tone optional The held party and the paged extension are connected and can start a conversation Using Paging Group to a particular paging group PT and SLT During a conversation For PT TRANSFER l For SLT be FA sat For PT Press TRANSFER For SLT Flash the switchhook Dial tone e The other party is placed on consul
294. nsion Press DSS flexible button number flexible button The Two Way Transfer indicator light turns red Stopping recording Two Way Tran Press Two Way Transfer flexible button The Two Way Transfer indicator light turns off Conditions PT A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two Way Record button or a Two Way Transfer button by Station User or System Programming s VPT Pressing the Two Way Record button sends an alarm tone if no idle voice mail port exists e PT Pressing the Two Way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone if no idle voice mail port exists PT When you record Two way telephone conversations you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded 390 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration DPT 1 12 Conversation Features e Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 5 2 19 Two Way Record Button Assignment e 5 2 20 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment User Manual 391 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 80 UCD Login Monitor Allows an extension user PT only to see at a glance
295. nsoles in the Features Guide gt To program 24 CO buttons use the proprietary telephone with 24 CO buttons such as KX T7230 e Ifyou press the same CO button again at step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tones When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO Loop CO PDN or SDN User Manual 129 User Programming Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Flexible e Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles 130 User Manual User Programming 3 2 6 006 Caller ID Dial Set Description Sets the identification code of the calling party Caller ID Code to utilize Caller ID Service provided by a specific central office CO If an ID Code transmitted from CO is found in the Caller ID Code Table the caller s ID Code or a name given to the code in program 007 Caller ID Name Set is displayed on the telephone allowing the called party to recognize the caller Selection e Location number 000 through 999 e Caller ID Code 24 digits max consisting of 0 through 9 or Default All locations Not Stored User Manual 131 User Programming Programming Display PT hoe tn Dial 006 Press NEXT Enter a location number 000 through 999 lt PT Displ
296. nswer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve e 3 3 Extension Group Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group 1 9 Answering Features e Call Pickup User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 199 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 14 Call Pickup Deny Allows you to prevent another extension from picking up your calls with the Call Pickup feature Setting Canceling PT and SLT on C272 ede 7z 2 o 0 To cancel J Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7201 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7200 and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt y G Wa When setting Hang up or press C Pickup Deny SP PHONE MONITOR When canceling C Pickup Allow Conditions e This feature does not apply to calls coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously e Applicable calls This feature applies to the following calls Call Type Outside calls Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA TIE Intercom calls Calls ringing on a single extension e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Progra
297. nter a non existent extension or floating directory number Please refer to Floating Station of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide e You should use a voice mail extension number that has been assigned by System Programming Please refer to Programming Guide References below Programming Guide References e 1 5 VPS DPT Port Assignment EXT No 1 DN 1 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 A Floating Directory Number FDN is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension 80 User Manual Station Programming EXT No 1 Group No EXT No 2 DN EXT No 2 Group No Voice Mail VM Transfer Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS PF button as a VM Transfer button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL Voice Mail G AA extension no STORE Press the desired Flexible Dial 8 Enter the Voice Mail Press STORE CO DSS PF button you extension number wish to assign as the VM 3 or 4 digits Transfer button The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt VTR CLR lt PT Display Example gt VTR XXXX xxxx VM extens
298. o Station Message Detail Recording SMDR of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide for further information The print out example is shown below Pig 2g 2s 2g 2g 2s 2g 2g 2s 2s E E E E E EEE E E E E E E EE E E E E E E os E oie E E E E E ofc E E oie ois E E ois E E E oie E ois E E E E E E E E ois E E ois E E E E K K K E K E E ois k k k K K k k k k K oi ok ok oe ok Date Time T Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Acct code CC EE EEEE EEEE 2 E E E E E EE E E E E E 2s E E E E E E E E os E E 2s E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 2c 2 E E E E E E E K K E K K K k k k k K k k k k K kkk k k 22 02 00 01 31PM _ 1 E1017 Timed Reminder Start 22 02 00 01 31PM _ 1 E1017 Timed Reminder No Answer 22 02 00 01 31PM_ 1 El017 Timed Reminder Answer e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e An Alert extension can be assigned for Day Night mode per tenant respectively by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension in the Programming Guide gt e Alert button assignment The Alert button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on the Alert extension e Alert Ringing A Timed Reminder alert can be sent to the alert extension when the extension user does no
299. o idle CO line 10101 10101 Idle CO line is captured 10101 Tony 10101 Tony Called by a CO line 10101 0 01 15 10101 0 01 15 Duration time of incoming CO call User Manual 539 Appendix English Display French Display Description 10101 amp 10102 10101 amp 10102 Conference with two CO lines Called by hold recall Conference Unattended 10101 Free 10101 LIBRE Called by Camp On CO line recall 10301 AB COMPANY 10301 AB COMPANY Received a CO call with a Caller ID the CO line number and the CO line name are assigned Conference CONFERENCE Confirm key programming on the Conference button CO in Use LR OCCUPEE The selected CO line is busy CO Not Assigned LR NON ASSIGNEE The desired CO line is restricted not assigned CONT RNGOFF BGM CONT SONN N MUS Ringer Volume is off Contrast CONTRAST Display Contrast Adjustment Data Mode Off PROTECTION NON Cancel Data Line Security Data Mode On PROTECTION OUI Complete to set Data Line Security Day Mode SERVICE DE JOUR Day mode status Cancel Night mode Night Service Do Not Disturb NE PAS DERANGER Confirm key programming on the FWD DND button Complete to set Do Not Disturb DND Door 1 Open PORTE 1 OUVRIR Complete to open the door Doorphone 1 PORTIER TEL 1 Make or rece
300. o make a normal call handling operation you must finish the programming mode Programming Mode Display When you enter into the Station Programming mode the display shows the following message as the initial programming mode PT PGM Mode We recommend a PT with display for Station Programming to avoid mis operation The display also gives you helpful or stored data information related to your programming steps In this section we note the display example in the programming steps if required You can also refer to the Display Examples in Section 6 Appendix Entering Station Programming mode Be sure that the telephone is idle and on hook oe Press PROGRAM Dial 99 The STORE indicator lights If 99 is not dialed within 5 seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed the Station Programming mode is canceled lt PT Display Example gt PT PGM Mode Initial programming display If there is no entry within one minute the Station Programming mode is canceled and normal call handling mode resumes automatically 50 User Manual Station Programming Exiting Station Programming mode When the display shows the initial programming mode PROGRAM Press PROGRAM To exit the Station Programming mode press PROGRAM You are in the call handling mode User Manual 51 Station Programming Confirming the assigned function data Be sure that you are in the Station Progr
301. o set or called by Timed Reminder one time mode Confirm Timed Reminder programming Alarm 10 15AM AVERT 10 15AM Complete to set or called by Timed Reminder everyday mode Confirm Timed Reminder programming Alarm Cancelled AVERT ANNULE Cancel Timed Reminder Alarm Not Stored AVERT NON REGLE Confirm Timed Reminder programming when it is not stored All Call Page RECH INT ET EXT Access to Paging All At Ext 1234 At Ext 1234 Absent Message 3 Back at 11 00 Back at 11 00 Absent Message 4 BGM On MUSIQUE OUI Start BGM BGM Off MUSIQUE NON Stop BGM Busy OCCUPE Resource is busy Busy Ovrde Allow ENT TIERS OUI Cancel Executive Busy Override Deny Busy Ovrde Deny ENT TIERS NON Complete to set Executive Busy Override Deny C Pickup Allow PRSE APPL OUI Cancel Call Pickup Deny C Pickup Deny PRSE APPL NON Complete to set Call Pickup Deny C Parked at 01 MISE EN ATT A 01 Complete to set Call Park C Waiting Off APPEL EN ATT NON Cancel Call Waiting C Waiting BSS AVERT PST OCC Complete to set Call Waiting BSS Callback Ext1234 RAPPEL PSTE 1234 Complete to set Camp On Callback 10101 RAPPEL 10101 Complete to set Camp On Callback TRG 01 RAPPEL GR LR 01 Complete to set Camp On Callback CO RAPPEL LR Complete to set Camp On when there is n
302. oming CO call that is waiting You can answer the second call by placing the first call on hold 7230 7235 7433 7436 While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset EFA Press EFA S2 e The current call is placed on hold and you can talk to the second caller e You can return to the first call by pressing the EFA S2 button again Using the FLASH button While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset FLASH Press FLASH The current call is placed on hold and you can talk to the second caller e You can return to the first call by pressing the FLASH button again 216 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Using the feature number PT and SLT While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset Le TRANSFER OR yY aN Press TRANSFER or flash the switchhook e You can talk to the second party e You can return to the first party by flashing the switchhook and dialing 6 again e The first party is placed on hold Conditions e This is an optional telephone company service For more information consult the local telephone company FLASH Button Operation Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal or disconnecting the current call This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 3 FLASH button operation while CO talking and 4 FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is
303. oming call A CO call is coming in on a single extension Other use Other hold Incoming call A CO call is coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously Items marked with are only available on the Single CO button BLF on DSS Button The Busy Lamp Field BLF indicator button is red when the corresponding extension is busy This is available for Direct Station Selection DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on Proprietary Telephones The following table shows the DSS Button indication and the status of Corresponding Extension DSS Button indication Status of Corresponding Extension Off Log in Red On Incoming call You or another extension is using the line Red slow flashing Log out User Manual 47 DPT Overview 48 User Manual Station Programming User Manual Section 2 Station Programming Note All illustrations used in this section are based on model KX T7235 49 Station Programming 2 1 Station Programming Instructions 2 1 1 Station Programming Instructions Station Programming allows you the Proprietary Telephone PT users to program certain features from your telephone individually To program you need to switch your telephone to the Station Programming mode During programming mode your telephone is in the busy condition to both inside and outside callers If you want t
304. on PT SLT If you want to hold the current call Monitoring HOLD INTERCOM LCS g a Gb r O o Hang up or press Lift the handset or press Press INTERCOM Press LCS SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button e An alarm tone is sent e Monitoring Starts PDN ANSWER Press PDN Press ANSWER Having a conversation with the party Press the flashing LCS Lift the handset or press flexible button SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions e PT The LCS indicator shows the feature status as follows Red steady The Live Call Screening mode is on Off The Live Call Screening mode is off Flashing green slowly Live Call Screening is acting Flashing green rapidly Alarm tone is ringing in the Private mode The LCS button which is assigned on a DSS Console except KX T7440 and KX 7441 will flash in red The LCS button which is assigned on the KX T7440 or KX T7441 will flash in red The DSS button indicator lights in red steady while Live Call Screening is active User Manual 289 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e PT The Two Way Record indicator shows the feature status as follows On Recording the conversation Off Not recording e PT During Keep Recording mode if you want to stop recording the conversation press the Two Way Recording button e PT Call Waiting If the extension user is busy on a call when a caller begins to leave a messa
305. on The BLF shows if the extension is busy PT and DSS Console Paired telephone DSS Console ro DSS N Lift the handset or press Press the desired DSS button SP PHONE NOMITOR 530 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 23 One Touch Dialing The stored number is dialed automatically by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button PT and DSS Console Paired telephone DSS Console DSS PF O Oor Lift the handset or press Press the desired SP PHONE NOMITOR DSS or PF button User Manual 531 DSS Console Features 5 2 24 One Touch Access for System Features You can access system features by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button PT and DSS Console Paired telephone DSS Console Loy DSS PF O N Lift the handset or press Press the desired SP PHONE NOMITOR DSS or PF button 532 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 25 Call Transfer A call can be transferred to an extension by using the DSS button PT and DSS Console During a conversation Paired telephone DSS Console TRANSFER DSS Press TRANSFER Press the desired DSS button One Touch Transfer An outside call can be transferred to an extension with a One Touch operation The One Touch Transfer function must be set by System Programming PT and DSS Console During a conversation DSS Console DSS Press the desired DSS button e The other party is placed on hold a
306. on group no E Incoming group 01 all incoming groups On hook through 96 or Extension group 01 through 128 gop twice to set twice to deny gog oo once to cancel once to allow o oo Glia dim fn On hook On hook On hook On hook g y GL Gd User Manual 481 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Sixth Display Call Log Incoming Selects whether the 31st call is disregarded or overwrites the oldest call y Log In Log Out Message Waiting Joins or leaves the Leaves a message extension group notification XM cancel Set XQ Dial 1 or 0 Dial 1 or 0 ooo ooo ooo ooo Dial extension MENU PREV NEXT Sixth Display Log Ovrt On Off Login Logout Message Off 31 0 31 0 ex ext 30 4 NEXT essage On Night Mode MENU PREV Va Night Service On se SEDER Off Turns on or off the night service mode number 1 overwrite On 1 Log In On ooo 0 disregard Off 0 Log Out Off ogg dim On hook On hook 4 On hook Gla Glia g GL 482 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Seventh Display Seventh Display OGM Playback 71 8 OGM Recording 71 8 Page Deny On Off 1 0 Page Ext Answer 1 2 Page GRP Answe
307. ong to two or more different Paging Groups at a time e To page extensions paged extensions must belong to some extension group s and this these extension group s must belong to some paging group s e Paging Group to different paging groups can be performed simultaneously e Paging Group feature overrides Do Not Disturb DND feature assigned to the paged extension Installation Manual References e 2 8 1 External Pager Paging Equipment Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant External Paging Tone Confirmation Tone for Station or External Paging e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Paging Station Paging e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve e 3 4 Paging Group Paging Group No Extension Group No Features Guide Reference 1 3 System Features e Background Music BGM External 1 5 Attended Features e Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 14 Paging Features e Paging User Manual Reference e 4 3 56 Paging Answer e 4 3 57 Paging Deny 336 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual 4 3 58 Paging and Transfer 4 3 78 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 4 4 2 Background Music BGM External 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 337 Station
308. or Press FEAT press SP PHONE DSS extension no OFT _ sd Dial the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder lt PT Display Example gt Alarm Cancelled 444 Rotate Jog Dial until R Timed Remind is displayed gt R Timed Remind SELECT MODE Co Press SELECT v Eba Hang up or press the SP PHONE Confirmation tone and dial tone gt R Timed Remind St Lock abcabc MENU SEL e Ea o Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL R Timed Remind is at the arrow y Gla Hang up or press the SP PHONE Confirmation tone and dial tone User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling PT and SLT DSS I Ta Lift the handset or press Dial 7X0 SP PHONE MONITOR Gla Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Checking the time setting Display PT C DSS R CEE T Lift the handset or press Dial 7X2 SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt Dial the desired extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder lt PT Display Example gt Alarm Cancelled Dial the desired extension Hang up or press number 3 or 4 digits or press SP PHONE DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder e If 10 10 has been set the display shows If time setting is not stored Alarm 10 10AM
309. orwarding FWD DND button Regarding the PT without the FWD DND button it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt No Answer Busy No Answer The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable lt Section 2 5 System Timer Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time in the Programming Guide gt If 0 is specified in Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time setting in Section 2 5 System Timer works Follow Me This feature can be canceled either at your extension or from the destination extension Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Call Forwarding Follow me in the Programming Guide gt User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT To CO TIE Line Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Call FWD to CO TIE in the Programming Guide gt Treatment of the forwarded call Toll Restriction Automatic Route Selec
310. ot Disturb KX T7436 KX T7235 only You can set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb features using the display Features on the First Display FWD DND Cancel Cancels the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb DND features at your extension Do Not Disturb DND On hook Rejects incoming calls Off hook FON Press the FWD DND button FWD DND First Display FWD DND Cancel Do Not Disturb FWD All Calls FWD Busy FWD No Answer MENU PREV On hook User Manual Call Forwarding Press the NEXT Sets forwarding all incoming calls S3 button to go to another extension when busy or to the next display when you do not answer Dial destination extension number On hook 459 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Second Display eee SS Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Sets forwarding incoming calls to another extension when busy or you do not answer Dial destination extension number Call Forwarding to CO TIE Line Sets forwarding all incoming calls to an external party On hook 4 3 Gw 460 Dial line access code 9 77 or 801 through 848 ooo Call Forwarding Follow Me Sets or cancels Call Forwarding All Calls from the destination extension ooo oOo o Dial destination phone number and
311. ou set the Call Forwarding function whose destination is Voice Mail The call will be forwarded to Voice Mail automatically If you do not set the Call Forwarding function The Operator will retrieve the call Then the Operator transfers the call to Voice Mail with Voice Mail Transfer button e Voice Mail can be assigned as the destination of the following features a Call Forwarding All Calls b Call Forwarding Busy c Call Forwarding No Answer d Call Forwarding Busy No Answer e Intercept Routing e How to listen to a voice message stored in your mail box lt Inband integration case gt 1 Off hook 2 Then press the red lit MESSAGE button 3 After accessing the VPS enter X and your mailbox number 4 Enter the password if you have one 5 Follow the voice guidance provided the VPS lt DPT integration case gt If your mailbox is a Direct Mailbox Access enabled one VPS programming you can skip steps 2 and 3 above o gt Led A flexible button can be assigned as the MESSAGE or FWD DND button User Manual 399 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration VPS 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding e Intercept Routing User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 F
312. ounter starts 422 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Playing back a message gt OGM Play 1 8 OGM Record 1 8 MENU SEL co I A Cc Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until Press FEAT Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL press SP PHONE FEAT is OGM Play is at the displayed arrow hr J AUTO DIAL OGM Group no l O STORE G ba a Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone Hang up or press number 1 through 8 playback is finished and dial tone SP PHONE e The STORE indicator light turns off lt PT Display Example gt OGM 1 Play 28 L Time counter seconds e The STORE indicator lights e The message is played back and the counter starts User Manual 423 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Playing back a message gt CSTE TE oc Lift the handset or press Dial 362 Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR number 1 through 8 STORE lt PT Display Example gt OGM 1 Play 28 __ Time counter seconds The STORE indicator lights e The message is played back and the counter starts Mp AUTO DIAL Tet y p gia Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone Hang up or press playback is finished and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR The STORE indicator light turns off Conditions 424 The following three types of outgoing messages can b
313. our extension of the reason for your absence By default Messages No 1 6 are provided with default messages and the other three messages are left blank PT and SLT 7 5 o x Parameters Lift the handset or press Dial 750 Dial message Dial parameters Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR number 1 9 if required and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR DISPLAY MESSAGE MESSAGE No PARAMETER Will Return Soon Gone Home None extension no Dial extension number Enter hour 00 23 and minute 00 59 Enter month 01 12 and day 01 31 At Ext Back at time Out Until _ month day None In a Meeting Programmable Programmable PEEVE EEE e E Programmable 156 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Note e indicates the digit where you enter the desired parameter Canceling the absent message PT and SLT h s A nd y gt CE y gida Lift the handset or press Dial 7500 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Message Cancel Conditions e All nine messages can be programmed either by User or System Programming e A maximum of seven parameters characters can be stored per message You can enter O through 9 X and for the parameters e display PT The message you select is shown on the display of you
314. ow the programming procedure according to your selection Note e If Idle Line Preference No Line Preference or Prime Line Preference S CO G CO or L CO is selected it is not possible to access any PT features after going off hook To access these PT features press the INTERCOM ICM type PT or PDN DN type PT button before or after going off hook No Line Preference Outgoing Assignment When you go off hook to make a call you are not connected to any line You must choose the line Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 fac 1 AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE The display shows the current e The STORE indicator lights status e The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt Pref Out No To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Tf PT is DN type then the default is PDN 92 User Manual Station Programming Idle Line Preference Outgoing Assignment When you go off hook to make a call you are connected to an idle line automatically Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 1 2 AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE e The display shows the current e The STORE indicator lights status e The display shows the initial programming mode lt PT Display Example gt Pref Out Idle To exit the Station Programmin
315. owing three modes Disable Disables this feature Own Group s Enables forwarding all calls to other Incoming Groups or Extension Groups Only its own group s can be set as the Call Forwarding setting extension Any Group Enables forwarding all calls to other Incoming Groups or Extension Groups Any group can be set as the Call Forwarding setting extension Forwarded call is not forwarded furthermore There can be only one stage of Call Forwarding If a call is forwarded to an extension in Call Forwarding mode the call is not forwarded furthermore Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user before being connected to the caller Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt Group FWD button Group FWD button can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Assignable destination is FDN of Incoming Group or Extension Group If DIL 1 N is specified in Group Type setting of Incoming Group this feature does not wor
316. party after placing the current call on hold 7130 7235 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT HOLD ca Press HOLD Talk The current call is placed on hold The INTERCOM indicator light flashes green slowly Conditions e BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA will be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions Calling extension Called extension Call Waiting setting COS OHCA OFF ON assignment 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS W OHCA Enable BSS OHCA BSS _ OHCA BSS OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 2 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PTs If Do Not Disturb DND feature is set at the called extension you hear DND tone In this case to execute OHCA you must first activate Do Not Disturb DND Override feature before OHCA is available e Call Waiting OHCA is only effective when the called extension has set Call Waiting feature If not you will hear a reorder tone after dialing 1 PTUCM This feature works when the called extension is having a conver
317. port Dial tone physical number Lift the handset or press SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt e When setting B Out 10201 e When no setting B Out None User Manual Press FEAT BSY Out Confirm SELECT MODE E Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT BSY Out Confirm is displayed y Gba Hang up or press SP PHONE BSY Out Confirm BSY Out Set MENU SEL m ea Caa A Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL BSY Out Confirm is at the arrow y Ga Hang up or press SP PHONE 453 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Confirming Display PT gt 7 2 62 trunk port physical no Lift the handset or press Dial 7262 Enter the trunk port physical SP PHONE MONITOR number hy lt PT Display Example gt lp gr cls e When setting B Out 10201 Dial tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR o Winen mo seting B Out None Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Trunk Busy out e 2 8 System Option ELCOT LCOT Busy out Loop Relay GCOT Busy out Loop Relay Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Trunk Busy Out User Manual References None 454 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 13 Trunk Route Control Allows the Manager and the Operators to make a call using a specific trunk They can verify the status of the specified trunk 7235 7436 D NEXT
318. programming mode is canceled e During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension e Only one Proprietary Telephone can be in programming mode at any one time e The User Programming Password is not shown on the display for security reason The password can be changed by System Programming Programming Guide References e 10 6 System Parameters Password User Programming PT User Manual 111 User Programming 3 1 2 Programming Methods Advancing to the next stage When SYS PGM NO s is displayed you can select one of the following e To go to program 000 press the NEXT button e To go to another program enter the 3 digit program address Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers extension numbers etc by using the dialing key pad and buttons Each of the twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad represents seven characters Please refer to Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX 1743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only Storing your data Press STORE to store your data e The STORE indicator lights in red and a confirmation tone sounds Confirmation tone one beep After pressing STORE you will hear a beep This informs you that storage is completed Alarm tone three beeps If you hear this alarm your entry is not valid Making another selection within the same program address e To go to the next selection p
319. ption 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan 214 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Answering Call Waiting call by SLT hooking e 4 3 Extension Line Call Waiting Tone Type Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting 1 12 Conversation Features e Data Line Security User Manual References e 2 2 2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment e 4 3 8 Busy Station Signaling BSS e 4 3 25 Data Line Security e 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 215 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 18 Call Waiting from Central Office During a conversation with an outside party a call waiting tone offered by the local Central Office signals your extension that there is another inc
320. pulse DP type single line device which does not have the and keys it is impossible to access features that have or in their feature numbers e When the Pickup Dialing Hot Line feature is set on your telephone the dialing sequence should be done within a certain period of time Pickup Dial Waiting Time default 1 s after lifting the handset This time can be changed by System Programming If you use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone which has the special function button or the display or both you will follow the operation with the button or display for easy access e If you use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone which does not have the function button you may change one of the unused buttons to another button Please refer to Section 2 2 Station Programming e A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone has the Light Emitting Diode LED button indicators so you can see the line conditions by the lighting patterns e If Idle Line Preference Outgoing No Line Preference Outgoing or Prime Line Preference CO Line Outgoing is assigned on the extension it is not possible to have access to any DPT features after simply going off hook To access DPT features press the INTERCOM ICM type PT or PDN button DN type PT directly or after going off hook Please refer to Button Line Access in Section 1 16 Button Features of the Features Guide for further information on ICM type PT and DN type PT For ISDN
321. r volume level 3 2 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction e The telephone will stop ringing in about 4 seconds e When the volume level is 0 no is indicated KX T7420 and KX T7425 1 Adjust the RINGER Volume Selector lever to the desired setting OFF LOW HIGH OFF e ee HIGH LOW To adjust the speaker volume 1 Press the SP PHONE button SP PHONE 2 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction e The display shows 2 lt Example gt We Seg A ee aoe volume level 12 e You may also adjust the speaker volume while listening to background music BGM On mode receiving a voice call receiving a page or hearing a call progress tone such as a dial tone Conditions Ifthe ringer volume of the KX T7431 is set to OFF the display while on hook is as follows Ring Off 12 00P e By pressing the display changes to show your extension number and name 101 John Smith 42 User Manual DPT Overview 1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series Display Contrast Adjustment KX T7230 and KX T7235 only A Soft button and the VOLUME Control button are used to adjust the display contrast The contrast level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks You can adjust the contrast level under the following conditions a When on hook or b During an outside intercom call i 1 Press the CONT S1 button 2 Press the VOLUME UP A DOWN
322. r MENU PREV NEXT a D Outgoing See the next page Message OGM operator manager only Refer to the Paging External corresponding feature Answer in Section 4 4 Operator Manager Answers a page sent Service Features to a particular C J external pager Paging DENY Dial the external pager Denies or allows number 1 or 2 being paged ooo ooo oo im Paging Group Dial 1 or 0 Answer aod Answers a page sent to a is built in speaker 1 Deny 0 Allow On hook v Gls User Manual 483 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Eighth Display MENU PREV NEXT Eighth Display Paging External 0 2 Paging Group 01 16 Parallel On Off 71 0 Pickup Dialing 1 0 Pickup DL Prg gt MENU PREV NEXT Paging External Pages through all or articular external Te T i Paralleled Telephone Pickup Dialing See the next Connection Hot Line page Sets the paralleled telephone Stores the number to call a connection on or off party by going off hook Dial the external pager number 1 or 2 or 0 1 or 2 external pager no R AN 0 all external pagers Dial 1 or 0 Pickup Dialing Hot Line oo a Sets or cancels Pickup Ai fn Dialing feature
323. r 01 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM e Clock hour 12 or 24 Default 00 JAN 1 SAT 12 00 AM 12 hour clock time 114 User Manual User Programming Programming Display PT 1 lt Date Setting gt Dial 000 Press NEXT Enter the year last 2 digits lt PT Display Example gt To change the current entry press lt PT Display gt CLEAR and enter the new year 000 DATE TIME 00 JAN 1 SAT 9 SELECT _ gt 7 8 gt A day Eu Press gt Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed SELECT 6 Keep pressing SELECT until Press gt Enter the day the desired month is displayed 01 through 31 To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new day lt Time Setting gt 12 13 ay oO hour Cc minute Press STORE Press NEXT Enter the hour Press gt Enter the minute 00 through 12 00 through 59 To change the current entry To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the press CLEAR and enter the new minute lt PT Display Example gt 12 00 AM 12 new hour 19 STORE 20 END 15 gt 16 select 17 a 18 seLect m E m E E Press gt Press SELECT for Press gt Press SELECT for Press STORE Press END AM or PM 12 or 24 clock hour User Manual 115 User Programming Conditions e After changing an entry you can press STORE You do not have to pe
324. r Manual References e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party e 4 3 25 Data Line Security e 4 3 34 Executive Busy Override Deny e 44 13 Trunk Route Control User Manual 263 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 34 Executive Busy Override Deny Allows you to prevent other extension users from interrupting your telephone conversation PT and SLT a PAS EREEL f ee J Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7331 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7330 and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt y G e When setting Busy Ovrde Deny Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR When canceling Busy Ovrde Allow Conditions e Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Deny e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e E
325. r PT whenever you go off hook e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Absent Message Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 5 8 Absent Message Features Guide References 1 17 Display Features User Manual 157 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e Absent Message Capability User Manual References e 3 2 8 008 Absent Messages Set e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 158 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 2 Account Code Entry An Account Code max 10 digits is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record For incoming CO calls account code entry is optional For outgoing CO calls you may be required to enter an account code This depends on your Account Code Entry mode determined by Syst
326. r Recall occurs the display shows lt Example gt RCL Ext 1003 Automatic Disconnection If there is no answer for 30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts the line will be disconnected Camp on Transfer When the transfer destination party is busy the call is put in waiting status If the destination party remains busy or does not answer the call within a specified period of time lt Section 2 5 System Timer Transfer Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt the call will ring back the extension who transferred the call or an Operator extension Remote Administration Any extension user can transfer a call to the Remote Resource Modem for Remote Administration A CO call can be transferred directly to a Uniform Call Distribution UCD group so that an idle extension is automatically hunted by UCD If all extensions in a UCD group are busy the incoming CO call will be handled by the UCD Time Table During a call transfer to the Remote Resource Modem a confirmation tone is not emitted after dialing the FDN for the Remote Resource Programming Guide References User Manual 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting Transfer to CO Automatic Hold 2 5 System Timer Transfer Recall Time CO to CO Line Call Duration Time 2 8 System Option Sound source during transfer Transfer recall destination Pressing DSS key operation in CO talking 4 3 Extension Line CO Key 4 4 DSS Conso
327. r going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Alert button assignment The Alert button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on the Alert extension An Alert extension can be assigned for Day Night mode per tenant respectively by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension in the Programming Guide gt Alert Ringing A Timed Reminder alert can be sent to the alert extension when the extension user does not respond to the Timed Reminder wake up call by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 65 Alert Ringing in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Programming Guide References 382 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension Day Night 2 3 Numbering Plan Timed Reminder Confirm Set Cancel 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Ringing Time Timed Reminder Arrive Count Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Alert Ringing 3 6 OGM Group OGM Type 4 3 Extension Line CO Key 10 4 SMDR Print out Timed Reminder Information 10 7 System Time User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM e
328. re location of the extension This feature is convenient if you don t want to change the current extension setting extension number etc after your desk is moved to another location in the office Start PT and SLT At the source extension amp CEECEE Lift the handset Dial 7271 Confirmation tone and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt WST E1234 On End PT and SLT At the destination extension gt 7 2 7 0 source extension no Lift the handset Dial 7270 Dial the source Confirmation tone extension number lt PT Display Example gt WST E1234 Off 404 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions The telephone type PT SLT OPX must be the same at the source and destination Walking Station is not available in the following cases If the extension is connected to a DHLC card KX TD50170 If the extension is connected to a HLC card KX T96170 in parallel If the extension is in hands free mode The status of the port must be INS In Service at the source and destination When the destination extension is in one of the following states is shown on the display Off hook incoming call Call Hold All buttons on PT are in use When you reset the system during this process the setting is canceled Programming Guide References 2 3 Numbering Plan Walking Station Features Guide References
329. re provided under separate cover in the Installation Manual and the Programming Guide Construction of This Manual This manual consists of the following sections Section 1 DPT Overview Provides configuration information on DPTs It provides an illustration of each telephone identifies their feature buttons supplies background information on these feature buttons and provides initial settings Section 2 Station Programming Provides the steps required to assign features to DPT flexible buttons and to the DPT system Section 3 User Programming Provides the steps required to assign some features to the system using a PT Section 4 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Provides background information on the PT features and lists the steps required to activate each feature Section 5 DSS Console Features Provides configuration information on the DSS Console It gives background information on the DSS Console features and lists the steps required to activate each feature Section 6 Appendix Provides Display Examples a Feature Number List Tone List and other information are explained in this section Features and Capabilities The KX TD500 System is a sophisticated and powerful system that satisfy just what you expect of an office communication s system Some of the remarkable features are listed below are only available for the KX 7235 and KX T7436 e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On informs you when the selecte
330. red direction KX T7433 and KX T7436 While on hook or during a conversation 1 Press the CONT S1 button CONT 2 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction e The display shows 2 lt Example gt Wi NS Con crase ss contrast level 3 User Manual 39 DPT Overview When using the headset The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a Proprietary Telephone PT When you use the headset optional you should switch the selection mode first Selection is explained in Section 2 2 5 Handset Headset Selection To change to the headset mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 9 2 STORE PROGRAM Changing the ringing tone of a CO button INTERCOM button There are eight ringer frequencies available for each CO Single CO Group CO Loop CO button DN PDN SDN button and INTERCOM button If you wish to change them please refer to Section 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons or Section 2 2 14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button Volume Control Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker Allows you to adjust the following volumes as required Handset Receiver volume levels 1 through 4 Headset volume levels 1 through 4 Ringer volume levels 0 through 3 Speaker volume levels 1 through 12 If your Digital Proprietary Telephone is provided with a display display DPT the volume level is indicated on the display by the number of as
331. rences e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 310 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Allows you to signal a busy extension on a handset call that your call is waiting Your voice is heard through the built in speaker of the called party s PT KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 The called extension user can select to talk to you or their initial caller Setting 7130 7235 7436 7 isila e a as Gla Lift the handset or press Dial 7312 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt C Waiting OHCA Canceling 7130 7235 7436 C f al amp CECE J cba Lift the handset or press Dial 7310 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt C Waiting Off User Manual 311 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Executing 7230 7235 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call h M BSS n S B3 Press BSS S1 Confirmation tone Wait for an answer and talk PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call l EE J Confirmation tone Wait for an answer and talk To talk to the third party 7130 7235 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset you hear a
332. res e Paging User Manual References e 43 55 Paging e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 341 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 58 Paging and Transfer You can transfer a call after making a paging announcement via Paging All Paging External or Paging Group Using Paging All PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER For PT h h i f Ysu Get 2 For PT Press TRANSFER _ Dial tone Dial 32 Confirmation tone Announce For SLT Flash the switchhook optional e The other party is placed on e You may dial 33 instead consultation hold fo z oO k Wait for an answer Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR optional e The held party and the paged extension are connected and can start a conversation 342 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Using Paging External to all external pagers PT and SLT During a conversation TRANSFER For PT i A For SLT i D 3 2 0 c2 For PT Press TRANSFER Dial tone Dial 320 Confirmation tone Announce For SLT Flash the switchhook optional e The other party is placed on consultation hold ola Wait for an answer Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR optional e The held party and paged extension are con
333. res e Secret Busy Override 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny 1 12 Conversation Features e Data Line Security User Manual References e None User Manual 369 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 70 Secret Dialing Allows you to conceal all or part s of a System Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing number assigned to a flexible button on your PT and DSS Console which normally appears on the display Additionally KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 and KX T7235 Model Telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for Station Speed Dialing numbers When storing the phone number INTERCOM Press INTERCOM before and after the part you wish to conceal lt PT Display Example gt 9 1 123 123 is not shown on the display when you dial Conditions e PT The secret code or pressing the INTERCOM button are counted as one digit l EE You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number e PT If the phone number 9 1 123 456 7890 has been stored the display shows the following when the call is made 1 456 7890 Programming Guide References e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Secret Dialing 1 7 Dialing Features e One Touch Dialing e System Speed Dialing 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory 370 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manu
334. ress Dial 7112 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt CLIP EXT Conditions CLIP Numbers for ISDN PRI Lines y Gd Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR ola Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR When you make an outside call using an ISDN PRI line one of the following numbers depending on your choice is displayed on the telephone of the other party as the CLIP number a CLIP number assigned to the trunk line The number stored in Subscriber lt Section 4 2 Trunk Line in the Programming Guide gt User Manual 219 Station Features and Operation PT SLT b CLIP number assigned to the extension line The number stored in CLIP Number Public Private lt Section 4 3 Extension Line in the Programming Guide gt e CLIP Number for ISDN BRI Line When you make an outside call using an ISDN BRI line the number stored in DN lt Section 1 2 10 Card Properties BRI SPID DN in the Programming Guide gt is displayed on the telephone of the other party as the CLIP number In this case above operations do not work e The CLIP number actually displayed on the telephone of the other party may be different from the system programmed CLIP number depending on the contract with your ISDN Service Provider e Disabling the CLIP service You can choose whether to utilize the CLIP service or not before making an outside call lt Section 4 3 20 Calling Line Identi
335. ress NEXT e To go to the previous selection press PREV To make a specific selection press SELECT and then enter the number 112 User Manual User Programming Accessing another program address After pressing STORE you can access another program by one of the following two methods a To go to the next program address e Higher program address lt KX T7200 series gt Press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME v DOWN lt KX T7400 series gt Rotate the Jog Dial clockwise e Lower program address lt KX T7200 series gt Press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME A UP lt KX T7400 series gt Rotate the Jog Dial counterclockwise b To go to a specific program address Press END then enter the program address Returning to the operation mode When the Initial Message SYS PGM NO is displayed press the PROGRAM button To display the Initial Message press END User Manual 113 User Programming 3 2 User Programming 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set Notice It is assumed that you have read Section 3 1 User Programming Instructions Soft button usage is explained in that section therefore no references will be made to them in the following instructions The soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys at any time Description Sets the current date and time Selection e Year 00 through 99 e Month JAN through DEC e Day 1 through 31 e Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT e Hou
336. rform the rest of the steps e To return to the previous field press lt in steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 16 e If you hear an alarm after pressing STORE check that the date is valid e The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed e You cannot leave an entry empty Features Guide References 1 17 Display Features e Display Date and Time 116 User Manual User Programming 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Description Used to program the System Speed Dialing numbers These numbers are available for any extension user in the system Selection e Speed dial numbers 000 through 999 e Telephone number 24 digits max Default All speed dial numbers Not Stored User Manual 117 User Programming Programming Display PT Lo JLo L1 Dial 001 Press NEXT lt PT Display gt lt PT Display gt 001 SYS SPD DIAL SPD Code gt telephone no Enter a telephone number Press STORE e To delete the current entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press END 118 speed dial no Enter a speed dial number 000 through 999 e To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT lt PT Display Example gt 000 Not Stored lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed NEXT SELECT speed dial no Enter the desired speed dial number 000 th
337. ring the call activity only not available for making or receiving a call 68 User Manual Station Programming Live Call Screening LCS Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Live Call Screening LCS button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 oo 22 Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 92 DSS button you wish to assign as the Live Call Screening button lt PT Display Example gt LCS AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Live Call Screening LCS Cancel Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Live Call Screening LCS Cancel button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 wo eis Press the desired Flexible CO DSS Dial 93 button you wish to assign as the Live Call Screening Cancel button lt PT Display Example gt LCS Cancel AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM t Available when the Digital Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Propriet
338. rogramming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Full One Touch Dialing e One Touch Dialing User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 5 2 13 One Touch Dialing Button Assignment e 5 2 14 One Touch Access Assignment for System Features e 5 2 23 One Touch Dialing e 5 2 24 One Touch Access for System Features 324 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 53 Operator Call Allows you to call an operator within the system PT and SLT FON Lo Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR e You may dial the FDN 3 4 digits for the Operator Group instead Conditions e Ifno operator is assigned this feature is not available and you will hear a reorder tone after dialing the feature number e Operator FDN The treatment of incoming calls to Operator is decided according to Operator FDN setting of the tenant lt Section 2 2 Tenant Operator FDN in the Programming Guide gt If the FDN for Operator Group is set as the destination of Extension Group or Incoming Group calls by the feature number for Operator Call will arrive at the destination If it is set to Blank calls will arrive at the destination of Extension Group e Ifthe FDN except for Operator Group is set or
339. rough z or the following marks amp 3 lt gt 2 Default All locations Not Stored 134 User Manual User Programming Programming Display PT Lo JLo L7 Dial 007 lt PT Display gt Press NEXT lt PT Display gt 007 CALLER NAME Location NO gt Caller ID Name Enter a Caller ID Name location no Enter a location number 000 through 999 e To enter location number 000 you can also press NEXT lt PT Display Example gt 000 Not Stored lt To continue gt When SELECT is pressed Press STORE e To delete the current entry press CLEAR e To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press END Conditions NEXT SELECT location no Enter the desired location number 000 through 999 Press NEXT or PREV or SELECT e Up to 1000 Caller ID Names per tenant 2000 per system can be assigned Each name corresponds to a Caller ID Code programmed by 006 Caller ID Dial Set e A Caller ID Name cannot be assigned if the corresponding Caller ID Dial is not assigned e For entering characters please refer to Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only 135 User Manual User Programming Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service 136 User Manual User Programming 3 2 8 0
340. rough 999 Press NEXT or PREV or SELECT User Manual User Programming Conditions There is a maximum of 1000 speed dial numbers per tenant However this can be changed by System programming System supports a maximum of 2000 speed dial numbers being shared among up to 8 tenants Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys and the FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To store the flash signal press FLASH Notes e The stored flash will only be effective during an established call Please refer to External Feature Access in Section 1 12 Conversation Features of the Features Guide To store a hyphen press the button To store a pause press PAUSE Please refer to Pause Insertion Automatic in Section 1 7 Dialing Features of the Features Guide To prevent displaying all or part of the number press SECRET before and after the confidential parts of the number Please refer to Secret Dialing in Section 1 3 System Features of the Features Guide If you are storing an external number enter the line access code default 9 801 through 848 before the number When dialing a pause is automatically inserted after the code If you are storing an account code enter the account code before the line access code Please refer to Account Code Entry in Section 1 3 System Features of the Features Guide It is possible
341. rrow Press SEL 2 AUTO DIAL amp STORE Press STORE or wait until a maximum recording time 30 seconds has elapsed e The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red e The recorded message will be played back automatically lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Play 28 fo Ebd Hang up or press SP PHONE Confirmation tone and dial tone The STORE indicator light turns off User Manual 419 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Recording a message PT and SLT 2 BTL oemereap ne Lift the handset or press Dial 361 Enter OGM Group Confirmation Record a message SP PHONE MONITOR number 1 through 8 tone up to 30 seconds lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Rec 00 Fates Time counter seconds OGM group number selected 1 through 8 AUTO DIAL SIORE e The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly Press STORE or wait until Confirmation Recording starts after the confirmation tone a maximum recording time tone 30 seconds has elapsed e The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red e The recorded message will be played back automatically lt PT Display Example gt OGM 2 Play 28 h AUTO DIAL par g E A GLA STORE Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone Hang up or press playback is finished and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e The STORE indicator light turns off 4
342. rwarded by these features are Call Type Outside calls Direct In Line DIL 1 1 Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing Multiple Directory Number MDN TIE Transfer Intercom calls Extension Transfer Items marked with are not available with Call Forwarding No Answer to CO TIE feature Forwarded call is not forwarded furthermore Call Forwarding can only be extended to one target extension For example extension A is forwarded to extension B and extension B is forwarded to extension C A call to extension A is forwarded to extension B but the call would not be forwarded to extension C Consequently extension B is treated as the final destination of Call Forwarding ny ExtA Ext B Se eee ae Ge gt User Manual Setting a new Call Forwarding feature All Calls Busy Busy No Answer etc cancels any other Call Forwarding features previously assigned to the extension Floating Station A floating station such as a DISA MODEM or external pager cannot be programmed as the call forwarding destination Two extensions can set each other as the call forwarding destination extension In this case an intercom call to the other party while he is absent will not be forwarded back to the original extension Message Waiting notification A message waiting notifi
343. s e Live Call Screening LCS User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 8 Live Call Screening LCS Mode Set e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 44 4 Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear User Manual 291 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 44 Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on hook they both are disconnected from the speech path automatically A reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before it is disconnected No operation is necessary 292 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 45 Log In Log Out Allows the extension user to join log in or leave log out the group They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls This feature can be categorized as follows Log In Log Out Allows members extension users of an Extension Group except Group Type None and Phantom Extensions to join log in or leave log out the group Group Log In Log Out Allows members extension users of an Incoming Group to join group log in or leave group log out the group The lighting patterns and status of the Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button are shown below Off Log In mode no calls Red On Log Out mode Red Slow Flash Log In mode Calls are waiting in the UCD queue Log In Log
344. s heard through the SP PHONE Switching from off hook monitor to handset call While in the off hook monitor mode SP PHONE Press SP PHONE The SP PHONE indicator light turns off e Off hook monitor mode is canceled and handset call mode is established Switching from off hook monitor to hands free mode While in the off hook monitor mode g 6Wa Hang up e Off hook monitor mode is canceled and hands free mode is established User Manual 321 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions e This feature is available for the following PT extensions only KX 7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 e Ifthe SP PHONE button is pressed during a handset call either Off Hook Monitor or SP PHONE mode hands free mode will be established This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 20 Off hook Monitor in the Programming Guide gt e Making an OHCA call is not available if the other extension is in Off Hook Monitor mode Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Off hook Monitor Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e Hands free Operation e Off Hook Monitor User Manual References e 4 3 41 Hands free Operation 322 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 52 One Touch Dialing Allows you to make a call intercom or outside or access a system feature with the touch of a button This is done by storing an extension number telep
345. s the doorphone Dial door opener number 1 through 8 External Modem Control Controls the external modem connected to the system with the RS 232C cable S Dial doorphone number 1 through 8 Enter AT command number 1 through 5 On hook q See the next page User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features on the Fifth Display FWD Cancel Once ext G FWD 31 0 FDN FDN gt G Login out 31 0 FDN Remote FWD LCS Password Cancel Once Log Lock Call abcabc MENU PREV NEXT operator manager only Group Log In Refer to the corresponding feature Log Out a Section re Joins or leaves the LCS See ee a beeen ec See the next page i J Sets or cancels the password for the Live Call Group Call FWD Screening feature Sets or cancels forwarding all amp J calls to an incoming group Peet 7 S D00 Call Log Lock oo z Cancel fry Incoming Denies or allows other people from pi Enter FDN for Enter FDN for source a A seeing your call source Incoming Incoming group log group 01 through 96 N J 01 through 96 oog oog Enter FDN for Bog fry Oi trovgngg Enter password Enter lock code A ye 000 through 999 000 through 999 01 96 incoming sels gag Enter FDN for destinati
346. sation or a conference with extension s or CO line s using the handset e PT DN BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT 314 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Installation Manual References e 2 3 3 DOHCA Card e 2 7 2 OHCA Card KX T96136 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting User Manual 315 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OQHCA Whisper This is a version of the OHCA feature The difference is OHCA provides two way communication between two extensions but this feature provides one way communication When this feature is activated the called party can hear caller s voice through the handset but the caller cannot hear the called party s voice By default this feature is available only when both calling and called extensions are using KX T7400 series PTs Setting 7420 7425 7433 7436 hy pd A FON 7 L3 JL1 Ls pe cbs Lift the handset or press Dial 7313 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE and dial
347. ser Manual References e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 172 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 7 Background Music BGM You can hear background music through the built in speaker of your PT An external music source such as a radio must be connected The music stops whenever a call comes in or when you go off hook Setting Canceling 7230 7235 7433 7436 When the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off BGM BJ B3 Press BGM S3 e To turn off the BGM press this button again When the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE MONITOR button is off ZA e The display shows either one of the following for five seconds depending on whether BGM is on or off lt PT Display Example gt BGM On BGM Off Conditions Hardware Requirements A user supplied external music source such as a radio is required to utilize this feature Up to two external music sources can be connected to the system e PT Turning on off You can turn on off the BGM only when your PT is not in use User Manual 173 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on Sys
348. should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area Connection to Telephone Line This unit must not be connected to a coin operated line If you are on a party line check with your local telephone company Incidence of Harm to the Telephone Lines Should terminal equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company shall where practical notify the customer that temporary discontinuance of service may be required However where prior notice is not practical the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service forthwith if such action is reasonable in the circumstances In case of such unnotified temporary discontinuance of service the telephone company shall 1 Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance of service 2 Afford the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise to the temporary discontinuance 3 Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to the procedures set out in Subpart E of Part 68 of FCC Telephone Equipment Rules Compatibility of the Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment a Availability of telephone interface information Technical information concerning interface parameters and specifications not specified in
349. sion Line Initial Display Selection Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Lock Password e 5 11 Caller ID Modification User Manual 469 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Local Call Area Code Local Call Digits to delete Local Call Number to be added Long Distance Call Digits to delete Long Distance Call Number to be added e 5 12 Caller ID Registration e 10 4 SMDR Print out Caller ID Information Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service 1 17 Display Features e Call Log Incoming User Manual References e 2 2 6 Initial Display Selection e 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 44 9 Remote Station Lock Control e 45 5 Call Log Incoming Log Lock KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 470 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 5 5 Call Log Incoming Log Lock KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only Allows you to lock the display of your extension so that the Call Log Incoming feature is not shown on the display if you do not want others to see the information Locking 7230 7235 7433 7436 same code g 4 A y e N 5 lock code lock code ol 3 Lift the handset or press Dial 57 Enter the 3 digit lock code Confirmation to
350. ss DSS flexible button lt PT Display Example gt DND Set EXXXX When setting or DND Cancel EXXXX When canceling User Manual 427 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP PHONE until FEAT is displayed destination extension no DSS Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button lt PT Display Example gt DND Set EXXXX or DND Cancel EXXXX 428 FEAT A c Press FEAT Confirmation tone and dial tone When setting When canceling gt Remote DND F N R Timed Remind MENU SEL E e a 8 Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL Remote DND is at the arrow Gba Hang up or press SP PHONE User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Setting Canceling lite amp WIP Lift the handset or press Dial 722 SP PHONE MONITOR Gla destination extension no Confirmation tone and dial tone Dial the destination extension number 3 or 4 digits or press DSS flexible button lt PT Display Example gt Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR DND Set EXXXX When setting or DND Cancel EXXXX When canceling Conditions e Remote DND Control operation sets or cancels the DND feature to the specified extension This depends on the status of the extens
351. ssevsecesessseacsoens costes 56 2 2 1 Bilingual Display Selection eee esceseceseeseeesseeeseecaeeseceseceseesseeseaecaaecaecsaeesseenes 56 2 2 2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment ee eeceeseesecenceeneceseceseeeaeeseaecaaecaeesaeenseeses 57 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment cccessccssetesceseneeseseneeoncesoeeeseeesscessentateoeeseaeeeetseeenss 58 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment 00 0 eee esessecereeeecesecescesseeeeaecaaeceaecnaeeeaeenes 82 2 2 5 Handset Headset Selection 2 2 0 2 cecccceecsscesseseeceeeerecetsocesseseseceeteceneesneceerseenseesseestes 83 2 2 6 Initial Display Selection wisi tei scsiyiess scceseie oes os a a NE E E RN 84 2 2 7 Intercom Alert Assignment 00 eee eesecseceseceseeeseeeseecseecsaesseceeceseesseescaecsaecsaeeneeeeeeenes 85 2 2 8 Live Call Screening LCS Mode Set ccc ecccccesceceseecesaeceeaeeeeaeeecsaeeenaeceeaeeeeeeeeeaes 86 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment ce eeeeeseceseeereceeeeeseeeeeeeeeenes 87 2 2 10 Phantom Button Ringing On Off Assignment 00 cei ceeceecceseeeseeeeeecneeceseesaeenaeeees 88 2 2 11 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 0 0 eeeeeeeseeseceeceeeeeeeeeeecaaecaeeseeeeneees 89 2 2 12 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing eee eeeeeseeseceeceeeeeeeeeeecaaeceaeeseeenaeeees 92 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons eesceseceeeeeeeceeeeseeseeecaeceaeesaeenseeees 95 2 2 14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button eceee
352. stem Option 25 Pressing DSS key operation in CO talking in the Programming Guide gt However it cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold One Touch Transfer by DSS or Phantom Button PT only Allows the PT user to transfer the call intercom CO TIE to an extension simply by pressing the DSS button associated with the destination extension This feature can be enabled or disabled on a COS Class of Service basis by System Programming lt Section 207 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold in the Programming Guide gt However it cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold DSS Button DSS buttons are provided on a DSS Console by default A flexible CO DSS button can be assigned as a DSS button by Station User or System Programming Ringing Pattern A call transferred to an extension will ring following the regular ringing pattern depending on the type of call intercom outside being transferred Screened Unscreened to CO TIE Line 208 Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Transfer to CO in the Programming Guide gt CO to CO call If a CO call is transferred to an outside party CO to CO call is established and the duration is restricted by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call
353. swer an incoming CO call your extension automatically records the call information from the Caller ID service and the SHIFT button indicator lights Up to 30 calls can be logged per extension When the call log is full 30 calls are stored you can select how the 31st call is treated Either a new call can be disregarded or the new call overwrites the oldest call default Record the new call You can also modify the logged numbers for callback purpose Setting overwriting the call log 7230 7235 7433 7436 hr R GE o Lift the handset or press Dial 56 Dial 1 Confirmation tone SP PHONE and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt Incoming Log On Canceling overwriting the call log Disregarding the 31st call 7230 7235 7433 7436 h 3 Sel a 9 Lift the handset or press Dial 56 Dial 0 Confirmation tone SP PHONE and dial tone lt PT Display Example gt Incoming Log Off y Eba Hang up or press SP PHONE y ola Hang up or press SP PHONE The Caller ID service provides you with a caller s information such as his her name and telephone number on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls Please refer to Caller ID Service in Section 1 5 Attended Features of the Features Guide for further information 464 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Logging a call information while talking KX T7433 KX T7230 KX T7436 KX T72
354. t PT and SLT Lift the handset Dial the extension number 3 or 4 digits Using the Speakerphone SP PHONE INTERCOM DN E SP PHONE or L or L extension no Press SP PHONE Dial the extension number Talk Press SP PHONE or INTERCOM or DN 3 or 4 digits Using a DSS Direct Station Selection button DSS 5 y m ga Lift the handset or press Press DSS i Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR flexible button SP PHONE MONITOR Conditions e Extension Number Assignment Extension numbers 3 or 4 digits are assigned to all extensions by System Programming lt Section 2 3 Numbering Plan in the Programming Guide gt Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed calling to other extensions in other tenants is enabled disabled by System Programming e Call Progress Tone After dialing an extension number you will hear one of the following tones Ringback tone Indicates the destination extension is being called Confirmation tone Indicates you can perform voice calling e g Paging Busy tone Indicates the destination extension is busy User Manual 279 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Do Not Disturb DND tone Indicates the destination extension has set the Do Not Disturb DND feature PT DSS Button DSS buttons permit One Touch access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field PT You can assign a DSS button on a Proprietary Telephone PT or DSS Console by Station
355. t However the SLT can answer the call e When the SLT is in use the display and the indicators of the PT will work in the same way as if the PT is in use e Inthe DPT SLT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the former e Inthe APT SLT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call a 3 party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call e The XDP feature is available Please refer to EXtra Device Port XDP in Section 1 1 System Expansion of the Features Guide User Manual 345 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e This feature is only available for PT extensions that are connected to a DHLC or HLC card e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Installation Manual References e 2 4 12 Parallel Connection of the Extensions Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Parallel XDP DHLC card Parallel XDP HLC card Features Guide References 1 1 System Expansion e EXtra Device Port XDP 1 3 System Features e Paralleled Telephone 1 6 Originating Features e Alternate Calling Ring Voice User Manual References e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu
356. t respond to the Timed Reminder wake up call by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 65 Alert Ringing in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension Day Night e 2 3 Numbering Plan Timed Reminder Remote e 2 5 System Timer User Manual 447 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Timed Reminder Ringing Time Timed Reminder Arrive Count Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Alert Ringing e 3 6 OGM Group OGM Type e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 10 4SMDR Print out Timed Reminder Information e 10 7 System Time Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 8 Ringing Features e Timed Reminder Wake Up Call e Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call User Manual References e 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set e 4 3 74 Timed Reminder Wake Up Call e 44 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback 448 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 4 12 Trunk Busy Out Setting Allows the Manager and the Operators to busy out a trunk Setting Canceling 7235 7436 Cc Features Lift the handset or press SP PHONE Press Features trunk port physical no Confirmation tone and dial tone Enter the trunk
357. t PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode Conference To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 62 User Manual Station Programming DAY NIGHT Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a DAY NIGHT button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 oO s STORE Press the desired Flexible CO DSS Dial 73 Press STORE button you wish to assign as the DAY NIGHT button AUTO DIAL lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode DAY NIGHT To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 63 Station Programming 64 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a DSS button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL CL 1 extension no oO STORE Press the desired Flexible Enter the extension number Press STORE CO DSS button you wish 3 or 4 digits to assign as a DSS button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial EXT programming mode CLR lt PT Display Example gt EXT XXXX CLR xxxx extension number e To erase an incorrect entry pr
358. t entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You cannot enter non existent extension or a floating directory number Please refer to Floating Station of Section 1 3 System Features in the Features Guide Programming Guide References e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Group Type A Floating Directory Number FDN is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension User Manual 67 Station Programming Group CO G CO Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Group CO button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 CL trunk group no Press the desired Flexible Dial Enter the trunk group Press STORE CO DSS button you wish number to assign as a G CO button 01 through 48 AUTO DIAL STORE e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial TRK GRP programming mode CLR lt PT Display Example gt e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e AG CO button assigned to a DSS button is available for monito
359. t first going off hook Conditions General e Class of Service COS programming COS programming determines the trunk group available for each extension user lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting in the Programming Guide gt PT All PTs in the system have one L CO button by default e Flexible CO Button Assignment A flexible CO button can be assigned as an S CO G CO or L CO button by Station User or System Programming as follows Button Type Assignable parameters Single CO S CO A specific outside line is assigned Group CO G CO A trunk group is assigned Loop CO L CO All outside lines are assigned User Manual 329 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 330 After dialing the feature number or pressing the CO button you will hear one of the following tones Dial tone Indicates an idle CO line is seized XXXXX is shown on the display if available xxxxx trunk port physical number Busy tone Indicates the selected CO line is busy COmimucse is shown on the display if available Reorder tone 1 Indicates the CO line you have attempted to access is not assigned CO Not Assigned is shown on the display if available 2 Indicates access to CO lines is denied Restricted is shown on the display if available Restricted may show on the display for the
360. t is not ringing yet Delayed Ringing e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Directed e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized this feature is only available for the calls ringing on an extension within the same tenant e Doorphone Call Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer doorphone calls e Call Waiting Call This feature applies to a call waiting call Group e Group Call Pickup Priority Outside call gt Transferred call gt Extension call gt Doorphone call e If more than one call is ringing on an extension Call Pickup to that extension works for the first arrived call e Call Waiting Call This feature does not apply to a call waiting call 198 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT CO Line Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized this feature is only available for an outside call ringing on an extension within the same tenant e If more than one CO call is ringing on an extension Call Pickup starts with the first arrived CO call e Call Waiting Call This feature does not apply to a call waiting call Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan CO Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS A
361. t the handset or press Dial 32 Dial external pager Confirmation tone Announce Wait for Talk SP PHONE MONITOR number 1 or 2 optional an answer lt PT Display Example gt Extrnl Page X L external pager number Paging Group To access all paging groups 01 16 simultaneously PT and SLT j Y SH 2 oF 9 3 N 3 4 lsls a be a Lift the handset or press Dial 33 Confirmation tone Announce Wait for an answer Talk SP PHONE MONITOR optional lt PT Display Example gt Group Page All 334 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Paging Group To access a particular paging group PT and SLT h aging group no it w CE 9 ca gre Lift the handset or press Dial 33 Enter the paging group Confirmation tone Announce Wait for Talk SP PHONE MONITOR number 01 through 16 optional an answer lt PT Display Example gt Group Page XX s paging group number O1 through 16 Conditions General e A confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the paging announcement is made Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 2 Tenant Confirmation Tone for Station or External Paging in the Programming Guide gt e A confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the paging announcement is answered Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation Tone for Call Pickup
362. tal Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 54 User Manual Station Programming Note e Please refer to Flexible Buttons in Section 1 1 4 Feature Buttons for applicability of CO DSS PF buttons Function Assignment PROGRAM 9 9 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing H 2 j Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 3 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment 4 Intercom Alert Assignment 5 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment 6 Self Extension Number Confirmation pa Call Screening Mode Set Initial Display Selection 8 8 __ Bilingual Display Selection Handset Headset Selection 0 1 Remote Station Lock Control see Operator Manager Service Features Section 4 4 2 Control of Call Log Incoming Log Lock see Operator Manager Service Features Section 4 4 0 3 Live Call Screening Password Control see Operator Manager Service Features Section 4 4 Station Programming Data Default Set O H x Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment PROGRAM Exit F Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 User Manual 55
363. tation Features and Operation PT SLT Error Message List Priority order Error Message Description Priority Alarm LED ERR xyy DSP1LNK DSP 1 link failure 2 ph ERR xyy CD FLT Card status fault 2 A Regarding the T1 card please refer to Reference Guide for T1 Digital Trunk card Legend Error Message x Shelf Number 1 3 yy Slot Number 01 14 Z Error Number Priority 1 Major Error 2 Minor Error Alarm LED When a problem occurs A LED on PT Top Shelf Card eee OFF ON B LED on PT Top Shelf eee OFF ON C LED ONPE rnn ciann OFF gt ON D LED on PT Card OFF gt ON The Alarm light turns red automatically The corresponding error message is shown on the display PT if it is idle by pressing the red lit Alarm button If the red lit Alarm button is pressed again whether the problem is solved or not the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display Date and Time or Self Extension number E LED on PT Top Shelf ee OFF ON The Alarm light turns red and the corresponding error message is shown on the display PT automatically if it is idle This situation continues until the problem will be solved When the problem is solved A B C D LED on PE cecene a isbean ON no change LED on Top Shelf Card ON OFF E LED on PT Top Shelf eee ON OFF 414 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT
364. tation hold 9 a Announce Wait for an answer ce Confirmation tone optional paging group no Enter a paging group number 01 through 16 Dial 33 Confirmation tone optional Sf Gla Hang up or press SP PHONE e The held party and the paged extension are connected and can start a conversation 344 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 59 Paralleled Telephone Connection A Proprietary Telephone PT can be connected in parallel with a Single Line Telephone SLT This feature allows you to enable or disable SLT ringing When a parallel connection is made either telephone can be used To enable disable SLT ringing 1 Ring go GOA Mee BP bs Lift the handset or press Dial 39 For Ring mode Dial 1 Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR For No Ring mode Dial 0 tone and dial SP PHONE tone MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Parallel On when enabling Parallel Off when disabling Conditions e The default is Parallel Off No ring e The PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is set to ring e When receiving a call If SLT ringing is enabled then both the PT and the SLT will ring except when the PT is in Hands free Answerback mode or Voice Calling mode with the Alternate Calling Ring Voice feature If SLT ringing is disabled then the PT rings but the SLT does no
365. ted beeetiee eters 131 3 24 007 Caller ID Name Set 22 23ecscsedectchaec ee cdsg eae kag cea aS a a 134 3 2 8 008 Absent Messages Set 0 c ce cececccccceseceeeeeeeeeeesaeceeaaeceaaeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseaaeceeaeeeeeeees 137 User Manual 13 Table of Contents 14 3 2 9 009 Quick Dial Number Set ccccecccccccecsssssececececessesssceceecsesensseeececcesensaaeeeecs 140 3 2 10 010 DISA TIE User Code Set ccc ienien na ae iaa A ekeeke 143 4 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 1 Before Operating eesriie EnS AEE E AEE E SEAE SEE SEE 148 4 1 1 Before Operating ic in uel el ne heli atl Se ae 148 4 2 Basic Operations ssena araa oa RE aan ARA RAA 151 42 Making Calls cusicieicssseteciteat a neces tice elated Ae 151 42 2 Rec iving Calls cici ten ates tice costes aed ake teed Meee E Maeva el bees a 154 4 3 Station Features and Operation ccscsssscsssscssssscsssccssssssssccsssscssssssesssssasssscsscense 156 4 3 1 Absent Message Capability 0 cee cee eeeesceeseceneecneceeceseesaeesseeesaecnaeceeeseecneeseneeeaees 156 433 2 Account COdE Enty noetan ia cos Meta a athedtetacee Macon ean 159 4 3 3 Alternate Calling Ring VOICE ee eeccesesneecneccnseceseeeeeeeneesaecnaeceeeseeeseeeaeesaaees 163 4 3 4 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation cceeeeesseesceeteceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeaeeenaee 166 4 3 5 Answering Direct Trunk 3 2 c 0l ain ascii di a Ges etd EE aai 168 4 3 6 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On
366. tem Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 8 2 External Music Source Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant BGM Source e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Background Music BGM External e Music on Hold 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Background Music BGM User Manual References None 174 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 8 Busy Station Signaling BSS You can prompt a busy extension ringing or during a call to answer your call The other extension hears three beeps and knows that you are waiting 7230 7235 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call BSS N as a Press BSS S1 Wait for an answer and talk PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call E co Wait for an answer and talk Conditions e BSS feature functions when the often busy extension is an ICM type PT in the following status a The extension is off hook b ICM button is idle c Call Waiting feature is enabled e BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT User Manual 175 Station Features and Operation PT SLT e BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a
367. tension number Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 6 Press HOLD END lt PT Display Example gt e The display shows the initial programming 10101 lt gt EXT1001 madle extension port physical number To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual 97 Station Programming 2 2 16 Station Programming Data Default Set Allows you to return each of the following items assigned by Station Programming to their default settings a Bilingual Display Selection default English b Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment default Tone 1 c Full One Touch Dialing Assignment default On d Handset Headset Selection default Handset e Initial Display Selection default Caller ID f Intercom Alert Assignment default Tone Call g Live Call Screen Mode Set default Hands free h Preferred Line Preference Incoming default Ringing Line i Preferred Line Preference Outgoing default INTERCOM Line Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming Clear Ready mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 98 User Manual Station Programming 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T
368. tension on a tenant basis When the system is in Auto mode the mode will be switched automatically in accordance with timetable in 2 1 Tenant screen of the PC programming When the system is in Manual mode the system keeps the current mode even though the time to change the mode automatically has arrived If DIL destination is not assigned for Lunch Break mode DIL destination performs in Day mode as usual Programming Guide References User Manual 2 2 Tenant DAY NIGHT Switching Mode Alert Extension Day Night Day SUN SAT Night SUN SAT Lunch_Start SUN SAT Lunch_End SUN SAT Break_Start SUN SAT Break_End SUN SAT 2 3 Numbering Plan Night Mode Set Cancel 2 4 Class of Service COS Switching Day Night Mode TRS Level Day Night Trunk Group Setting Day Night 3 2 Trunk Group 309 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Intercept Destination Day Night e 3 3 Extension Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night e 3 5 Incoming Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key e 4 5 Doorphone Destination Day Night e 9 2 DID Dial Registration Destination Day Night Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Night Service User Manual Refe
369. terisks For ringer volume adjustment three levels OFF LOW HIGH are available with the KX T7420 and KX T7425 To adjust the handset receiver volume 1 Lift the handset 1 2 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction e The display shows lt Example gt 2 Handset volume level 3 e You may also adjust the handset receiver volume during a conversation using the handset receiver 40 User Manual DPT Overview To adjust the headset volume Be sure the headset is connected SP PHONE 1 Press the SP PHONE button GES 2 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction 2 e The display shows We lt Example gt Headset volume level 3 To adjust the ringer volume KX T7433 and KX T7436 While the telephone is ringing We 1 Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction e The display shows lt Example gt Ringer volume level 3 While the telephone is idle and on hook 1 Press the RING S2 button e The telephone will ring 2 R h Dial in the desired directi Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction e The telephone will stop ringing in about 4 seconds e When the volume level is 0 no indication the display shows RNGOFF User Manual 41 DPT Overview KX T7431 1 While the telephone is idle and on hook MODE 1 Press the MODE button five times Cc e The display shows 2 lt Example gt Ringe
370. ternal modem External Modem Control MW at Ext 1234 MESS PST 1234 Complete to set Message Waiting MW Not Accepted MESS ATT REFUSE Not complete to set Message Waiting MW Cancel E1234 MESS ANNUL P1234 Cancel Message Waiting of desired extension MW Cancelled MESS ATT ANNULE Cancel one s own Message Waiting Night Mode SERVICE DE NUIT Night mode status Cancel Day mode Night Service No Held Call AUCUN APPEL ATT There is no held call when retrieving call on hold or parked call No Incoming Call AUCUN APPEL ENT There is no incoming call when trying to pick up the call Not Valid NON VALIDE Illegal operation OGM 1 Play 28 REP 1 LECT 28 When playing back the OGM OGM 1 Rec 12 REP 1 ENP 12 When recording the OGM Out Until 12 12 Out Until 12 12 Absent Message 5 Paging Deny Off APPEN GEN NON Cancel Paging DENY Paging Deny On APPEN GEN OUI Complete to set Paging DENY Parallel Off PARALLELE NON Cancel Paralleled Telephone Connection Parallel On PARALLELE OUI Complete to set Paralleled Telephone Connection Park at 00 N A ATT A OON VAL Not complete to set Call Park PT PGM Mode TP MODE PROG Entered the Station Programming mode RCL Tony Viola RAPL Tony Viola Called by transfer recall with name Call Transfer RCL Ext 1234 RAPL P
371. ther party is placed on hold and the destination is called immediately Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Pressing DSS Key Operation in CO talking User Manual 535 DSS Console Features 5 2 27 Monitoring an outside line activity You can monitor the activity of an outside line by assigning an S CO button Section 5 2 17 Single CO S CO Button Assignment or a G CO button Section 5 2 8 Group CO G CO Button Assignment or both Conditions e This feature is not available for the DSS Console connected to a PLC or HLC card e This feature is available for the DSS Console connected to a DLC or DHLC card whose LPR version is 1 or above e You can confirm the LPR Version lt Section 1 2 4 Card Properties DHLC ESLC DLC in the Programming Guide gt 536 User Manual Appendix Section 6 Appendix User Manual 537 Appendix 6 1 Appendix 6 1 1 Display Examples Due to the Bilingual Display Selection Feature you can select the display in English or French The left part is the English display and the right part is the French display English Display French Display Description Set Time amp Date REGLER HEUR DATE Factory setting Shown on the manager s display only FRI JANO1 12 00A VEN JANO1 12 00A The current date and time are not set Pressing X while on hook alternates between this display and the self extension number and n
372. this manual gt or System Programming lt Section 5 5 Quick Dialing in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Quick dial 1 Quick dial 8 e 5 5 Quick Dialing Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Quick Dialing User Manual References e 3 2 9 009 Quick Dial Number Set 360 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 66 Redial Redial feature can be categorized as the following two types Type Description Last Number Saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again Saved Number Allows the PT user to save a telephone number while in conversation on a CO line or while hearing a busy tone and redial the number afterwards The saved number can be redialed until another number is stored Redialing the last outside phone number you dialed Last Number Redial oy REDIAL J Lift the handset or press Press REDIAL Dial SP PHONE MONITOR Saving the outside phone number for redialing Saved Number Redial During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone AUTO DIAL SAVE STORE Press STORE Press SAVE flexible button Dialing PO tV Lift the handset or press Press SAVE flexible button SP PHONE MONITOR User Manual 361 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions General e Up to 24 digits excluding the CO line ac
373. tion User or System Programming Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Answering Direct Trunk 1 16 Button Features Button Line Access 168 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 41 Hands free Operation User Manual 169 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 6 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On When the selected CO line or extension you have dialed is busy dial the camp on code and hang up Your telephone will ring when the selected CO line or the called party becomes idle Setting 7230 7235 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making a call intercom or outside fh CER al Wait for g Gba the Camp On recall Press C BCK S3 Confirmation tone Hang up or press and reorder tone SP PHONE PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making a call intercom or outside C6 g Wait for G the Camp On recall Confirmation tone Hang up or press and reorder tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Callback Extxxxx L extension number 170 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Answering an intercom recall PT and SLT If you hear the telephone ringing Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR lt
374. tion ARS and Account Code Entry requirements of the extension in Call Forwarding mode still apply to the call forwarded by this feature If you are storing an account code enter the account code and then the delimiter 99 before the line access code Extension to CO Line Call If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the call duration can be restricted by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt This restriction applies to the extension whose Time Limit of Outside Calls setting Class of Service programming is set to Yes by System Programming CO to CO Line Call If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature the call duration is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out Trunk to Trunk Connection Before utilizing this feature Trunk to Trunk Restriction should be enabled by System Programming You can store the telephone number up to 24 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 and PAUSE PAUSE can also be stored by dialing x No Answer To CO TIE Line User Manual The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable lt Section 2 5 System Timer Section 4
375. tion many symbols are used Most symbols do not need a description but some symbols do They are as follows ron Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE or MONITOR button Off hook Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE or MONITOR button On hook Flash the switchhook on a Single Line Telephone Tones which vary depending on the condition Please refer to Section J 6 1 3 Tone List 150 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 2 Basic Operations 4 2 1 Making Calls Inter Office Calling You can make a call to another extension PT and SLT Ley x DSS l D g ON extension no or L a G a Lift the handset or press Dial extension number Press DSS Talk Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 3 or 4 digits SP PHONE MONITOR The INTERCOM or PDN indicator light turns green Outward Dialing You can make a call to an outside party using one of the following three Trunk Access ways a Trunk Access Idle b Trunk Access Trunk Group c Trunk Access Individual Trunk PT only Making Outside Calls by Trunk Access Idle Allows you to access an idle trunk line automatically PT and SLT CO j O For PT fi 2 ur hi 4 9 smer proves a Lift the handset or press For PT Press CO assigned Dial tone Dial the phone number Talk SP PHONE MONITOR as Loop CO For SLT PT Dial 9 Gla Hang up or press The selected CO indicator The display shows the
376. tion No found on the rear side of the unit e Ringer Equivalence No 0 4B e Facility Interface Code 02LS2 02GS2 02RV2 T OL13C 04DU9 BN 1KN 1SN e Service Order Code 9 0F AS 2 6 0P e Required Network Interface Jack RJ21X RJ11 RJ48C Note Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC s rules and Proper answer supervision is when A This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are e Answered by the called station e Answered by the attendant e Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user e Routed to a dial prompt B This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN Permissible exceptions are e A call is unanswered e A busy tone is received e A reorder tone is received Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely User Manual 11 Telephone Company
377. tive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call FWD Do Not Disturb Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS DND Override e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature FWD DND lamp pattern e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Lock Control 1 6 Originating Features e Do Not Disturb DND Override 1 8 Ringing Features e Do Not Disturb DND 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 246 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 28 Do Not Disturb DND Override e 44 7 Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control User Manual 247 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 28 Do Not Disturb DND Override You can override the Do Not Disturb DND feature set on the other extension if permitted by System Programming beforehand 7230 7235 7433 7436 If you make an intercom call and hear the Do Not Disturb DND tone ver o El sa a Press Over S2 Wait for an answer and talk lt PT Display Example gt 101 DND PT
378. ton User Manual 545 Appendix 6 1 2 Feature Numbers List Numbers listed below are the initial factory settings default value There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers The flexible feature numbers can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 3 Numbering Plan in the Programming Guide gt Flexible Feature Numbers Feature Default Additional Digits 1st hundred block extension 10 00 99 2nd hundred block extension 11 00 99 3rd hundred block extension 12 00 99 4th hundred block extension 13 00 99 5th hundred block extension 14 00 99 6th hundred block extension 20 00 99 7th hundred block extension 21 00 99 8th hundred block extension 22 00 99 9th hundred block extension 23 00 99 10th hundred block extension 24 00 99 11th through 16th hundred block extension 00 99 Absent Message set cancel 750 1 9 0 Account Code Entry 49 Account code 99 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On cancel 46 Background Music BGM External on off 35 Call Forwarding set cancel 710 2 6 0 Call Forwarding Follow Me set cancel 710 7 8 your extension no Call Hold 50 Call Hold Retrieve outside call 53 trunk port physical no Call Hold Retrieve intercom call 51 extension no Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode set 56 1 0 cancel Call Log Incoming Log lock 57 000 999 twice Call Log Incoming Log Unlock 57 000 999 same lock code
379. ton you wish number to assign as an S CO button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights CO The display shows the initial programming mode CLR lt PT Display Example gt COS xxxxx trunk port physical number CLR e To erase an incorrect entry press the CLR S2 button or the TRANSFER CLEAR button The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the Station Programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e You cannot assign the same CO line to more than one S CO button on a PT e You can assign the same CO line to an S CO button a G CO button and an L CO button respectively e AnS CO button assigned to a DSS button is available for monitoring the call activity only not available for making or receiving a call User Manual TI Station Programming 78 Tone Through Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Tone Through button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 co 78 Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 78 Press STORE DSS button you wish to assign as the Tone Through button AUTO DIAL STORE lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode Tone Through To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation
380. tone phone number In All Security Mode DISA phone no Dial the DISA phone number h f Ringback tone extension no Dial the extension number Ringback tone h ip S a Dial the extension number DISA outgoing message Ringback tone You can dial the DISA AA Automated Attendant number instead hy f Dial tone DISA user code DISA outgoing message Enter the pre assigned DISA user code You can dial the DISA AA Automated Attendant number instead User Manual 237 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Calling an outside party From Outside Telephone In Non Security Mode DISA phone no Dial the DISA phone number Dial the phone number of the outside party h Ringback tone DISA outgoing message In Trunk Security Mode h l hy ng ki pa Dial the DISA phone number Ringback tone DISA outgoing Enter a line access message code h it line access code v Enter a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 Dial tone from Central Office h me DISA user code Dial tone 3 Enter the pre assigned DISA user code 9 or 801 through 848 Dial the phone number of the outside party Dial tone from Central Office In All Security Mode My f neg Be DISA phone no v J v 2 Dial the DISA phone number hy pai line access code abe j Enter a line access code 9 or 801 through
381. tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt C Waiting W OHCA Canceling 7420 7425 7433 7436 h ip d ro Teoh na ty ola Lift the handset or press Dial 7310 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE and dial tone SP PHONE lt PT Display Example gt C Waiting Off 316 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Executing 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call fi BSS Wy 82 83 Press BSS S1 Confirmation tone Wait for an answer and talk 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call h ie EE J Confirmation tone Wait for an answer and talk Receiving a voice announcement 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call you hear a confirmation tone Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller two way and the third party one way lt PT Display Example gt The caller s extension number and name are shown on the display for five seconds in 10 seconds intervals 123 Tony ___ Caller s extension number User Manual 317 Station Features and Operation PT SLT To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands free mode 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call you
382. tons DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field BLF Used to access extensions The BLF indicates the busy or idle status of each extension in the system These buttons can also be changed to other function buttons PF Programmable Feature Buttons KX T7040 KX T7240 only These buttons are provided with no default settings With a paired telephone you can program the buttons as other function buttons ANSWER Button KX T7441 only Used to answer an incoming call RELEASE Button KX T7441 only Used to disconnect the line User Manual 505 DSS Console Features 5 2 DSS Console Features 5 2 1 Station Programming Both DSS buttons and PF buttons KX T7040 and KX T7240 only are provided with no default settings To meet your various needs DSS buttons can be changed to other function buttons Every DSS or PF button can be assigned to another extension number telephone number or feature number by Station Programming 506 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 2 Account Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an Account button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL DSS PF Oo o D 6 a STORE Press the desired Press STORE DSS or PF button lt PT Display Example gt Account The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial pro
383. try No Code TRS Level 10 4 SMDR Print out Account Code 161 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Account Code Entry e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry 162 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 3 Alternate Calling Ring Voice You can voice announce your intercom call or have the called extension ring When you make an intercom call by voice announcement the other party hears your voice over the built in speaker of PT and can speak in the hands free mode Alternating to Voice Calling mode 7230 7235 7433 7436 If the extension you are calling is in Ring Calling mode you hear a ringback tone M l Voice ie BJ 53 Press Voice S3 Confirmation tone Voice Calling mode is established PT and SLT If the extension you are calling is in Ring Calling mode you hear a ringback tone Confirmation tone Voice Calling mode is established User Manual 163 Station Features and Operation PT SLT Alternating to Ring Calling mode 7230 7235 7433 7436 If the extension you are calling is in Voice Calling mode you hear a confirmation tone h qe
384. ty During a two party conversation you can add a third party to make a three party conference The members of a conference on a line may be three extensions one extension and two CO lines or two extensions and one CO line To establish a 3 party conference During a two party conversation h h pA desired L9 pa A three party 4 p A 1e conference party s no A conference is now established Press CONF Confirmation Dial desired Talk to the Press CONF Confirmation tone and dial party s third party tone optional tone number The CONF indicator light turns steady red The corresponding CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light turns green Press a CO button or enter a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 before an external phone number The current party is placed on hold The CONF indicator light flashes red slowly During a two party conversation Mp oe aLe fen cone ty sno 4 Conference l party s no a me is now established Flash the Confirmation Dial desired Talk to the Flash the Dial 3 Confirmation switchhook tone and dial party s third party switchhook tone optional tone number Enter a line access code 9 or 801 through 848 before an external phone number The other party is placed on hold User Manual 223 Station Features and Operation PT SLT To leave a 3 party conference PT and SLT g Gba Hang up or press SP PHONE e The other two parties
385. ushita Electric Corporation of America One Panasonic Way Secaucus NJ 07094 Panasonic Sales Company Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico Inc Ave 65 de Infanter a Km 9 5 San Gabriel Industrial Park Carolina Puerto Rico 00985 http www panasonic com csd Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd PCC You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model Except above you may not reproduce this manual in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of PCC and its licensee 2000 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan PSQX1495SA KK0899MN6113 M
386. ut For all Incoming groups For Log In mode Dial 481 For an Incoming group Enter FDN 3 or 4 digits For Log Out mode Dial 480 For all Incoming groups Dial x SP PHONE MONITOR Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone Conditions User Manual lt PT Display Example gt y Gha Group Log in or SP PHONE MONITOR Group Log out When extensions are logged out calls directed to the above mentioned group do not come in on their extensions However calls directed to their individual extension extension call DIL 1 1 etc still ring at their extension The extension user cannot leave the group log out if at least one call is coming in on the group PT Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button can be assigned to a flexible CO button by Station User or System Programming With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using a display operation UCD Login Monitor lt For Extension Group members gt Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button UCD Login Monitor is enabled or disabled by System Programming lt For Incoming Group members gt Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored by the extension specified as the Supervisor Extension through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button
387. ver Display PT If there is any message waiting notification the message waiting lamp another extension message waiting lamp or phantom extension message waiting lamp MESSAGE indicator light will be on When the telephone is idle and on hook MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE or O_N or Another Extension Phantom Extension Message Waiting Message Waiting Press MESSAGE Another Extension Message Waiting or the Phantom Extension Message Waiting repeatedly until the desired message appears e The message notifications you received are shown on the display in the order they were received lt PT Display Example gt When Tony at extension 1123 left a message waiting notification 1123 Tony 298 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Calling back the message waiting notification sender MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE or J or Another Extension Phantom Extension Message Waiting Message Waiting Lift the handset or press Dial tone 4 when Press MESSAGE Another Extension SP PHONE MONITOR a message has been Message Waiting or the Phantom Extension received at your Message Waiting extension If there are more than one message e The message waiting waiting notification left on your notification is cleared after the extension you can choose the desired conversation message sender display PT only SLT with Message Lamp hy Q nd EY 7 Lo L2 ca Lift the handset or press Dial tone 4
388. warding All Calls to an Incoming Group Automatically transfers all calls to an Incoming Group to the pre assigned Incoming Group or Extension Group Setting PT and SLT CQ EO e Lift the handset or press Dial 7141 Enter the FDN fora Enter the FDN fora Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR source Incoming destination Incoming and dial tone Group 3 or 4 digits Extension Group 3 or 4 digits lt PT Display Example gt cia Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Canceling PT and SLT ron 7 J 4 0 Lift the handset or press Dial 7140 Enter the FDN fora Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR source Incoming and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Group 3 or 4 digits G FWD 186 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are Call Type Outside calls Direct In Lines DIL Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing Multiple Directory Number MDN TIE Transfer Intercom calls Extension Transfer User Manual Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Incoming Group FWD in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature The Call Forwarding setting extension varies depending on the foll
389. which UCD Group Members are logged in and which ones are logged out Write down the DNs of the UCD Group Members that you want to monitor Write them on the TEL CARD of your PT Using Station Programming lt Section 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment in this manual gt User Programming lt Section 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment in this manual gt or System Programming lt Section 4 3 Extension Line in the Programming Guide gt assign each DN to a DSS button on your PT Extension Group Enable LOGIN Monitor lt Section 3 3 Extension Group in the Programming Guide gt for your UCD group Incoming Group Specify the Supervisor Extension lt Section 3 5 Incoming Group in the Programming Guide gt for your UCD group When a UCD Group Member is logged out the corresponding DSS button on your PT will flash red Programming Guide References e 3 3 Extension Group Group Type UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor e 3 5 Incoming Group Group Type UCD Setting Supervisor Extension e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Uniform Call Distribution UCD User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 392 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 81 UCD Monitor Mode Allows the extension user specified as the Supervisor Extension to monitor the number
390. xecutive Busy Override 264 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny User Manual References e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 45 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu User Manual 265 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 35 External Feature Access Allows you to access special features e g Call Waiting offered by a host PBX Centrex or Central Office This feature is effective only during an outside call 7230 7235 7433 7436 During a conversation with an outside party EFA code E0 BA E Press EFA S2 Enter the desired service code Using the FLASH button During a conversation with an outside party FLASH code Press FLASH Enter the desired service code The current call is placed on hold Using the feature number PT and SLT During a conversation with an outside party TRANSFER For PT h J Lel o A For PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone Enter the desired For SLT Flash the switchhook and dial tone service code The current call is placed on hold 266 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Conditions e Flash Time The flash time must be assigned as required by the Centrex host PBX or CO line e
391. xtension numbers must be assigned by System Programming lt Section 5 3 Phantom Extension in the Programming Guide gt before assigning the Phantom button e Ifyou assign the Phantom button to one of the CO buttons CO 13 through CO 24 on a PT with 24 CO buttons such as KX T7230 and change the telephone to a PT with 12 CO buttons such as KX T7235 you must re program the setting because CO 13 through CO 24 are not provided with the PT with 12 CO buttons If you do not change the setting the phantom extension call appears on the INTERCOM ICM type PT or PDN DN type PT button e More than one identical Phantom button cannot be assigned on a single extension User Manual 73 Station Programming 74 Primary Directory Number PDN Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible CO button as a PDN button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 AUTO DIAL io 4 STORE Press the desired Flexible CO Dial 74 Press STORE button you wish to assign as a PDN button lt PT Display Example gt PDN The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e A PDN button can be assigned to any one of the flexible CO buttons on a PT by Station User or System Programming Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned to any flexible CO button on a PT However the first
392. y Call User Manual References None User Manual 257 Station Features and Operation PT SLT 4 3 32 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies This system allows you to signal the other end using DTMF tones during an established call End to End DTMF Signaling 1 During a conversation required code Dial the required code e DTMF signal is sent to the other end while dialing End to End DTMF Signaling 2 When Automatic Hold is enabled During a conversation Tone Through required code Press Tone Through Dial the required code flexible button e DTMF signal is sent to the other end while dialing 258 User Manual Station Features and Operation PT SLT Canceling End to End DTMF Signaling mode During a conversation Tone Through Press Tone Through flexible button e Tone Through mode is canceled Conditions e If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing sequence is finished and the call is established en ET Tone Through button This button can be assigned to a flexible button CO DSS by Station User or System Programming e PT Tone Through button is effective during a call between two extensions extension to outside or a conference call Programming
393. y Example gt Release The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM Conditions e For the KX T7441 the RELEASE button is provided as a fixed feature button 520 User Manual DSS Console Features 5 2 16 SAVE Button Assignment You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a SAVE button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone DSS PF ies oe ee 5 Press the desired DSS or PF button lt PT Display Example gt Save To exit the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM User Manual Paired telephone AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial programming mode 521 DSS Console Features 5 2 17 Single CO S CO Button Assignment You can assign a DSS button as a Single CO button Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode Press PROGRAM 9 9 PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone d o trunk port physical number Press the desired Enter the trunk port physical Press STORE DSS button number AUTO DIAL STORE lt PT Display Example gt e The STORE indicator lights e The display shows the initial CO i programming mode

Panasonic KX-TD 500 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents